Microscan MS-880 Industrial long range scanner User's Manual

MS-880
Industrial
Long Range Scanner
User's Manual
P/N 83-000880 Rev G
Copyright © 2002
by Microscan Systems, Inc.,
1201 S.W. 7th Street, Renton, Washington, U.S.A. 98055
(425) 226-5700 FAX: (425) 226-8682
ISO 9001/Certification No. 00-1047
All rights reserved. The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the
purpose of allowing customers to operate and/or service Microscan manufactured equipment
and is not to be released, reproduced, or used for any other purpose without written permission
of Microscan.
Throughout this manual, trademarked names might be used. Rather than put a trademark (™)
symbol in every occurrence of a trademarked name, we state herein that we are using the
names only in an editorial fashion, and to the benefit of the trademark owner, with no intention
of infringement.
Disclaimer
The information and specifications described in this manual are subject to change without
notice.
Latest Manual Version
For the latest version of this manual, see the Download page on our web site at
www.microscan.com. For technical support email [email protected].
ii
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Microscan Limited Warranty Statement and Exclusions
What is Covered?
Microscan Systems Inc. warrants to the original purchaser that products manufactured by it will
be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of
one year from the date of shipment. This warranty is specifically limited to, at Microscan’s sole
option, repair or replacement with a functionally equivalent unit and return without charge for
service or return freight.
What is Excluded?
This limited warranty specifically excludes the following: (1) Any products or parts that have
been subject to misuse, neglect, accident, unauthorized repair, improper installation, or abnormal conditions or operations; (2) Any products or parts that have been transferred by the original purchaser; (3) Customer mis-adjustment of settings contrary to the procedure described in
the Microscan Systems Inc. owners manual; (4) Upgrading software versions at customer
request unless required to meet specifications in effect at the time of purchase; (5) Units
returned and found to have no failure will be excluded; (6) Claims for damage in transit are to
be directed to the freight carrier upon receipt. Any use of the product is at purchaser’s own risk.
This limited warranty is the only warranty provided by Microscan Systems Inc. regarding the
product. Except for the limited warranty above, the product is provided “as is.” To the maximum
extent permitted by law, this express warranty excludes all other warranties, express or implied,
including but not limited to, implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
purpose. Microscan Systems Inc. Does not warrant that the functions contained in the product
will meet any requirements or needs purchaser may have, or that the product will operate error
free, or in an uninterrupted fashion, or that any defects or errors in the product will be corrected,
or that the product is compatible with any particular machinery.
Limitation of Liability.
In no event shall Microscan Systems Inc. be liable to you or any third party for any special, incidental, or consequential damages (including, without limitation, indirect, special, punitive, or
exemplary damages for loss of business, loss of profits, business interruption, or loss of business
information), whether in contract, tort, or otherwise, even if Microscan Systems Inc. has been
advised of the possibility of such damages. Microscan Systems Inc.’s aggregate liability with
respect to its obligations under this warranty or otherwise with respect to the product and documentation or otherwise shall not exceed the amount paid by you for the product and documentation.
Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages or limitations on an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to
you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which may
vary from state to state.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
iii
Table of Contents
Chapter 1
Quick Start
Step 1 Hardware Required...................................................................... 1-2
Step 2 Connect the System .................................................................... 1-3
Step 3 Install ESP-MP............................................................................. 1-6
Step 4 Select Scanner Model.................................................................. 1-7
Step 5 Select the Communications Ports................................................ 1-8
Step 6 Connect with Auto Connect ......................................................... 1-9
Step 7 Retrieve Scanner Settings ......................................................... 1-10
Step 8 Compare Scanner Settings........................................................ 1-11
Step 9 Position Scanner and Symbol.................................................... 1-12
Step 10 Autocalibrate Scanner ............................................................. 1-13
Step 11 Test Range for Bar Code Label ............................................... 1-14
Step 12 Make Changes to Configuration and Save .............................. 1-15
Chapter 2
Communications
Communications Options ........................................................................ 2-2
Host Port Parameters.............................................................................. 2-5
RS422 Status .......................................................................................... 2-7
Auxiliary Port ........................................................................................... 2-8
Daisy Chain Autoconfigure.................................................................... 2-16
Daisy Chain Remote Scanner ID .......................................................... 2-17
IrDA Port ............................................................................................... 2-18
Menu Mode ........................................................................................... 2-19
Chapter 3
Protocol
Protocol ................................................................................................... 3-4
LRC ......................................................................................................... 3-9
Response Timeout ................................................................................ 3-10
Intercharacter Delay.............................................................................. 3-11
Output Data Format .............................................................................. 3-12
Auxiliary/Configuration System Data..................................................... 3-14
Network Client....................................................................................... 3-15
Chapter 4
Read Cycle/Trigger
Trigger Mode........................................................................................... 4-4
Serial Trigger......................................................................................... 4-10
External Trigger State ........................................................................... 4-12
End of Read Cycle ................................................................................ 4-13
Multilabel ............................................................................................... 4-16
Chapter 5
Codes
Narrow Margins....................................................................................... 5-5
iv
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Symbology ID .......................................................................................... 5-6
Background Color.................................................................................... 5-7
Code 39 ................................................................................................... 5-8
Codabar................................................................................................. 5-11
Interleaved 2 of 5................................................................................... 5-14
UPC/EAN............................................................................................... 5-17
PDF417 ................................................................................................. 5-20
Code 128 ............................................................................................... 5-22
UCC/EAN-128 ....................................................................................... 5-23
Code 93 ................................................................................................. 5-26
Pharma Code ........................................................................................ 5-27
Autodiscriminate .................................................................................... 5-29
Chapter 6
Autocalibration
Overview of Autocalibration..................................................................... 6-2
Autocalibration by ESP............................................................................ 6-4
Autocalibration by Serial Command ........................................................ 6-7
Autocalibration by Embedded Menu........................................................ 6-8
Chapter 7
Calibration Database
Overview of Calibration Database ........................................................... 7-2
Calibration Database by ESP .................................................................. 7-3
Calibration Database by Serial Command .............................................. 7-4
Calibration Database by Embedded Menu.............................................. 7-6
Chapter 8
Optoelectrics
Overview of Optoelectrics........................................................................ 8-4
Optoelectric Database Modes ................................................................. 8-5
Chapter 9
Raster/LaserControl
Raster Setup............................................................................................ 9-3
Laser Setup ............................................................................................. 9-6
Raster/Laser by Embedded Menu........................................................... 9-9
Chapter 10
Scanner Setup
Scan Speed ........................................................................................... 10-4
Focus..................................................................................................... 10-5
Gain Adjustment .................................................................................... 10-6
Tracking................................................................................................. 10-6
Transition Counter ................................................................................. 10-7
Maximum Element ................................................................................. 10-8
Chapter 11
Matchcode
Overview of Matchcode ......................................................................... 11-4
Matchcode Type .................................................................................... 11-5
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
v
Master Label Database ....................................................................... 11-11
New Master Pin................................................................................... 11-16
Chapter 12
Outputs
Noread Message................................................................................... 12-4
Bar Code Output ................................................................................... 12-5
Serial Verification .................................................................................. 12-8
Beeper Status ..................................................................................... 12-10
Quality Output ..................................................................................... 12-11
Chapter 13
Output Format and Filtering
Overview of Output Format/Filtering ..................................................... 13-4
Extraction Mode .................................................................................... 13-5
Insertion Mode ...................................................................................... 13-7
Advanced Output Format by ESP ......................................................... 13-9
Multilabel Output Format Assignment ................................................. 13-10
Ordered Output/Filtering ..................................................................... 13-11
Master Database in ESP..................................................................... 13-16
Chapter 14
Discrete I/0
Input 1 ................................................................................................... 14-4
Output 1 ................................................................................................ 14-5
Output 2 .............................................................................................. 14-10
Output 3 .............................................................................................. 14-10
Diagnostic Outputs.............................................................................. 14-11
Chapter 15
Diagnostics
Warning Messages ............................................................................... 15-4
High Temperature Threshold ................................................................ 15-8
Low Temperature Threshold ................................................................. 15-9
Lifetime Hours ..................................................................................... 15-10
Present Ambient Temperature (deg. C) .............................................. 15-11
Counts................................................................................................. 15-12
Time Since Last Reset ........................................................................ 15-13
Chapter 16
Wiring Box Option
Wiring Box Description.......................................................................... 16-2
Installation Steps................................................................................... 16-3
Wiring Box Ports ................................................................................... 16-5
Wiring Box PCB with Connectors.......................................................... 16-8
Mounting Plate ...................................................................................... 16-9
Chapter 17
Utilities
File Transfer .......................................................................................... 17-5
Counters................................................................................................ 17-6
vi
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Part Number .......................................................................................... 17-8
Checksum.............................................................................................. 17-9
Read Rate ........................................................................................... 17-10
Device Control ..................................................................................... 17-12
Code Type ........................................................................................... 17-13
Defaulting/Saving/Initializing................................................................ 17-13
Appendices
Appendix A General Specifications .........................................................A-2
Appendix B Electrical Specifications .......................................................A-6
Appendix C IrDA Configuration Port......................................................A-13
Appendix D IrDA/Ir Comm for Palm Pilot...............................................A-15
Appendix E Serial Configuration Commands ........................................A-16
Appendix F Serial Command Format ....................................................A-19
Appendix G ASCII Table .......................................................................A-21
Appendix H Embedded Menus..............................................................A-23
Appendix I Defaulting/Saving/Initializing................................................A-24
Appendix J Position Scanner and Bar Code .........................................A-28
Appendix K Position Object Detector ....................................................A-29
Appendix L Test Decode Rate...............................................................A-30
Appendix M Formulas for Number of Decodes ....................................... A-31
Appendix N Operational Tips.................................................................A-35
Appendix O Interface Standards ...........................................................A-36
Appendix P Multidrop Communications.................................................A-38
Appendix Q Glossary of Terms .............................................................A-43
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
vii
List of FiguresFigure 1-1 Hardware Configuration
1-2
Figure 1-2 Side Connections ..................................................................... 1-3
Figure 1-3 Bottom Connections ................................................................. 1-3
Figure 1-4 MS-880 with Wiring Box ........................................................... 1-4
Figure 1-5 Wiring Box Connections ........................................................... 1-5
Figure 1-6 Read Ranges ......................................................................... 1-12
Figure 1-7 Depth of Field ......................................................................... 1-14
Figure 4-1 Trigger Level ............................................................................ 4-6
Figure 4-2 Trigger Edge ............................................................................. 4-7
Figure 6-1 Typical Autocalibration Graph .................................................. 6-2
Figure 6-2 Autocalibration Setup ............................................................... 6-3
Figure 6-3 Autocalibration In Process ........................................................ 6-4
Figure 6-4 Autocalibration Passed ............................................................. 6-4
Figure 6-5 Embedded Autocalibration Setup Menu ................................... 6-8
Figure 6-6 Embedded Calibration Results Menu ..................................... 6-11
Figure 6-7 Advanced Autocalibration Menu ............................................. 6-12
Figure 7-1 Database Menu ........................................................................ 7-3
Figure 8-1 Control Trigger Inputs ............................................................... 8-8
Figure 8-2 ESP Control Trigger Setup ....................................................... 8-8
Figure 9-1 ESP Laser Framing Control ..................................................... 9-7
Figure 9-2 Laser Framing Pattern .............................................................. 9-7
Figure 9-3 Embedded Calibration Results Menu ....................................... 9-9
Figure 12-1 Read Cycle ........................................................................... 12-7
Figure 13-1 Output Format Extraction ..................................................... 13-5
Figure 13-2 Output Format Insertion ....................................................... 13-7
Figure 13-3 Advanced Formatting Screen ............................................... 13-9
Figure 13-4 Multilabel Output Format Status ......................................... 13-10
Figure 16-1 Wiring Box ............................................................................ 16-2
Figure 16-2 Scanner/Wiring Box Assembly ............................................. 16-3
Figure 16-3 Attaching the Scanner .......................................................... 16-4
Figure 16-4 Relay Module ....................................................................... 16-5
Figure 16-5 Relay Jumpers ..................................................................... 16-5
Figure 16-6 Relay Module ....................................................................... 16-6
Figure 16-7 Wiring Box PCB .................................................................... 16-8
Figure 16-8 Wiring Box Bottom Plate ...................................................... 16-9
Figure A-1 MS-880 Scanner Dimensions .................................................. A-2
Figure A-2 Mounting Dimensions .............................................................. A-4
Figure A-3 Electrical Connectors ............................................................... A-6
Figure A-4 Trigger Connector .................................................................. A-13
Figure A-5 Scanner/Label Position .......................................................... A-28
viii
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Figure A-6 Object Detector ......................................................................A-29
Figure A-7 Ladder ....................................................................................A-31
Figure A-8 Raster Picket Fence ...............................................................A-32
Figure A-9 Picket Fence ...........................................................................A-33
Figure A-10 Angled Picket Fence ............................................................A-33
Figure A-11 Polling Sequence .................................................................A-40
Figure A-12 Polling Sequence .................................................................A-41
List of Tables
Table 5-1 Symbology Identifier Option Values ........................................... 5-6
Table 9-1 Maximum Sweep Rates at Selected Sweep Arcs ...................... 9-5
Table 11-1 Maximum Characters for Master Label Database ............... 11-13
Table 17-1 Summary of Utility Serial Commands .................................... 17-3
Table A-1 MS-880 FIS Options ..................................................................A-3
Table A-2 MS-880 Read Ranges ...............................................................A-3
Table A-3 MS-880 Status Lights (on the side of the MS-880) ....................A-4
Table A-4 Power Connector .......................................................................A-7
Table A-5 Trigger Connector ......................................................................A-7
Table A-6 Host 9-pin Configuration Connector ..........................................A-7
Table A-7 Host 25-pin Connector ...............................................................A-8
Table A-8 Serial Configuration Commands in Numeric Order .................A-16
Table A-9 ASCII Table with Control Characters .......................................A-21
Table A-10 Communication Protocol Commands ....................................A-22
Table A-11 Multidrop Addresses ..............................................................A-42
About the MS-880 Scanner
The MS-880 scanner is designed for versatile, robust operation in an industrial automation environment. It offers wireless programming, autofocus, Windows-based software,
linear and 2-D code reading, several connectivity paths, multiple protocol and communications options, and a variety of advanced input/output features.
Its application code resides in an onboard flash memory chip that can be easily updated
by downloads.1 A user interface program, the ESP-MP (Easy Setup Program–Multi-platform), can be downloaded from our web site (www.microscan.com) and runs on
Microsoft Windows 95™, Windows 98™, Windows NT™ and Windows 2000™ operating
systems. Alternately, configuration commands can be sent from an embedded, menudriven terminal program, or directly by host serial command strings.
The scanner is offered as a standalone or in combination with a wiring box. Four optional
network plug-in protocol cards are also available when using the wiring box option.
1. See your Microscan sales representative to access the latest application codes.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
ix
About This Manual
This manual provides complete information on setting up, installing, and configuring
the MS-880 scanner. The chapters are presented in the order in which a scanner
might be setup and made ready for industrial operation. Host serial commands are
presented side-by-side with ESP and embedded menus.
Chapter 1, “Quick Start” provides overall step-by-step instructions for getting your
scanner operational with specific “go to” references to other chapters and appendices.
Chapter 6, “Autocalibration” explains in detail the autocalibration procedure and the
interpretation of the results.
Chapter 7, “Calibration Database” tells how to setup a database of the optical settings
you gathered in autocalibration.
Chapter 8, “Optoelectrics” tells how to setup input/output connections for control of
calibration database settings and includes gain, tracking, and AGC settings.
Chapter 9, “Raster/Laser Control” explains raster and laser setup settings.
Chapter 11, “Matchcode”, Chapter 12, “Outputs”, and Chapter 13, “Output Format
and Filtering” provide instructions for setting up matching labels, data output, and
data formatting for special operations.
Chapter 14, “Discrete I/0” lists input/output functions controlled by discrete electrical
levels, including diagnostic warning outputs setup in Chapter 15, “Diagnostics.”
Chapter 16, “Wiring Box Option” describes the wiring box, if used, and it’s installation
and port connections.
Chapter 17, “Utilities” describes ESP-MP utility commands and their related serial commands for read rate tests, defaulting, etc.
The appendices include specifications, reference tables of serial commands, ASCII
characters, multidrop setup and addresses, as well as other useful information relating to bar coding and electrical and mechanical setups for the scanner.
Host Communications
There are three ways the scanner communicates with a host:
1. Microscan’s Windows™ based ESP-MP™ (Easy Setup Program—Multi-Platform),
the preferred method which offers point-and-click ease of use and visual
responses to user adjustments.
2. Serial commands such as <K100,r1> can be sent from a terminal program. They
can also be sent from the Terminal or Utility window within ESP-MP.
3. Embedded onboard menus are accessed from a terminal window with a <D>
command. These menus lack some of the functionality of the ESP-MP, but may be
more responsive in older, slower computers.
x
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Keystrokes
Serial commands, selections inside instructions, and menu defaults are highlighted in
red bold. Cross-references are highlighted in blue. Web links and outside references
are highlighted in blue bold italics. References to menu topics are highlighted in
Bold Initial Caps. References to topic headings within this manual or other documents are enclosed in quotation marks.
Approvals
This equipment is in compliance or approved by the following organizations:
• CDRH (Center for Devices & Radiological Health)
• UL (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.)
• cUL (UL mark of Canada)
• TüV (Technischer überwachungs-Verein)
• FCC (Federal Communication Commission)
• CE Compliant
• BSMI (Bureau of Standards, Metrology and Inspection)
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
xi
Safety Labels
The following labels are located on the side and back of the MS-880 scanner:
AVOID
EXPOSURE
LASER LIGHT IS EMITTED
FROM THIS A PERTURE
side
11-110013-01
CLASS II LASER PRODUCT
CAUTION
LASER LIGHT DO NOT
STARE INTO BEAM.
650 nm LASER DIODE
1.0 MILLIWATT MAX
LASERSTRA HLUNG,
WENN
ABDECKUNG
VORSICHT
GE ÖFFNET. NICHT IN
DEN STRAHL BLICKEN
LASERSTRAHLUNG NICHT IN
DEN STRAHL BLICKEN
LASER KLASSE 2
94nJ @ 38uS
EN 60825-1: 1994
DIN VDE 0837 Teil 1: 1994-07
CA UTION-L AS ER L IG HT WH EN OP EN- DO NO T S TA RE INTO B EA M.
P RODUCT CO NFORMS TO USA DHHS 21 CFR S UB CHAP TER "J"
bottom
xii
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Warning and Caution Summary
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will
not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help
For connection to a UL listed direct plug-in power unit marked Class II and rated 10 to
28 VDC at 6 watts, or greater if using electrical accessories.
European models must use a similarly rated Class I or Class II power supply that is
certified to comply with standard for safety EN 60950.
WARNING
Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein may result in hazardous laser light radiation
exposure.
WARNING
There are no user serviceable parts in the scanner. Opening the scanner voids the Microscan Systems warranty and could expose the user
to laser diode power of up to 7 mW.
WARNING
The laser beam can be harmful to eyesight. Avoid eye contact with the
laser beam. Never point the beam at other people, or in a direction
where people may be passing.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
xiii
xiv
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Quick Start
1
Chapter Contents
Step 1 Hardware Required ..........................................................................1-2
Step 2 Connect the System.........................................................................1-3
Step 3 Install ESP-MP .................................................................................1-6
Step 4 Select Scanner Model ......................................................................1-7
Step 5 Select the Communications Ports ....................................................1-8
Step 6 Connect with Auto Connect .............................................................1-9
Step 7 Retrieve Scanner Settings .............................................................1-10
Step 8 Compare Scanner Settings ............................................................1-11
Step 9 Position Scanner and Symbol ........................................................1-12
Step 10 Autocalibrate Scanner..................................................................1-13
Step 11 Test Range for Bar Code Label ...................................................1-14
Step 12 Make Changes to Configuration and Save ..................................1-15
This chapter is designed to get your scanner up and running quickly using
Microscan’s ESP-MP™ so the user can get a sense of its capabilities and test bar
code samples. Detailed setup information for installing the scanner into the
actual application can be obtained in the subsequent chapters.
In addition to ESP, you can send commands to your scanner by serial commands and through the scanner’s embedded menus.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
1-1
1–Quick Start
Chapter
1–Quick Start
Step 1 — Hardware Required
(Refer to figure 1-1.)
To get started you will need:
• An MS-880 standalone scanner (1) FIS-0880-0001, or an MS-880 scanner with a
wiring box (2) FIS-0880-0002.
• A host computer (3) with either a terminal communications program or Microscan’s
ESP™ which runs under Windows™ operating system, Windows-95 or higher, including Windows NT™.
• A null modem 9-pin configuration cable (4) P/N 61-000010-01.
(Use cable P/N 61-300026-01 if your computer uses a 25-pin serial port connector.)
• A power supply (5), P/N 97-100004-1005 (120V) or P/N 97-100004-06 (240V).
Caution: If using your own power supply, be certain that it is wired correctly and supplies voltage within the +10 to 28 VDC limits. Incorrect wiring or voltage can cause
software or equipment failures.
Note: An optional object detector (6) is shown here (P/N 99-440001-10) with the
standalone.
1
3
4
6
4
5
2
5
Figure 1-1 Hardware Configuration
1-2
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 1 Quick Start
Using the MS-880 Standalone
1. Attach your computer’s host cable to either the 9-pin shown in figure 1-2 or the
25-pin connector shown in figure 1-3.
2. The 9-pin port is used for setting up, testing, and defaulting the scanner.
a. Attach power supply to the 3-pin power connector on the bottom of the scanner
as shown in figure 1-3.
IrDA port
2 Receive
3 Transmit
5 Signal ground
9-pin Host
configuration connector
Figure 1-2 Side Connections
Chassis
ground
2
3
Power +10 to
28 VDC (in)
Power
ground
1
25-pin host connector
1
Power
Ground 17
18
Power
Power
connector
25
3
4
1
2
Trigger connector
Note: Power connector pins are best identified by their relationship
to the notches on the outside edge of the connector.
Figure 1-3 Bottom Connections
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
1-3
1–Quick Start
Step 2 — Connect the System
1–Quick Start
Using the MS-880 with the Wiring Box
1. Make certain the wiring box power cord is not plugged in.
2. Connect the scanner to the computer.
3. Use the 9-pin configuration connector shown in figure 1-4 to connect with your
computer. This port is useful for setting up, testing, and defaulting the scanner.
IrDA port
2 Receive
3 Transmit
5 Signal ground
9-pin Host
Configuration
Connector
Figure 1-4 MS-880 with Wiring Box
4. Connect power to the wiring box as shown in figure 1-5 on page 1-5.1
5. Apply power to the wiring box and confirm that the LED lamp next to right side
power terminal is green and not red.2
6. Disconnect power.
1. Refer to Chapter 16, “Wiring Box Option” and Appendix B — “Electrical Specifications” for
complete input/output details.
2. While the MS-880 scanner has reverse polarity protection built in to its circuitry, the wiring box
does not protect external circuits that may already be wired in when power is applied.
1-4
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 1 Quick Start
1–Quick Start
Power Input
+10 to 28 VDC
40-31000 8-0 1
K3
REV. 2
K1
K2
2
4
6
J10
33
1
M1
JP 1
34
J13
J8
J7
J9
JP3
JP2
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
R EL A Y
3
4
PA S S
5
6
J17
-
+
1
M3
J1
5
2
Shield
MADE IN U.S.A .
J12
1
3
5
M ICRO S CAN
PA S S
4 3-3100 08 R EV S /N :
REL A Y
–
+
RELAY 1 OUT
-
1
2
3
4
5
6
+5
FIELDBUS
S HLD
RTS R
X
GND
+
+5VDC
–
GND
TX
SHLD R
X
TX+ TX–
INPUT1
AUX RS232
RS232
M2
C TS
POWER
1 0-28 VDC
P+
P
-
GND
RX+ RX–
NEWMASTER
TX
GND CHS
+
R EL A Y 2 O U T R EL A Y 3 O U T
RS422/485
-
+
TRIGGER
SHL D P- TRI
G
P+
M4
POWER
10-28VDC
P+
P
-
D
1
POW ER
10-28VDC
P+
P
-
POWER
LED
10-28VDC
GREEN=OK
RED=RVS.POL.
J
1
J2
Auxiliary power connector
allows power cable to be
conveniently installed from
either end of the box.
J6
J5
J3
J4
DC–
DC+
Lamp is GREEN if polarity is correct
Lamp is RED if polarity is reversed
Figure 1-5 Wiring Box Connections
7. Plug the ribbon cable (provided with wiring box) into the bottom of the scanner.
See figure 16-2 on page 16-3.
8. Attach scanner to the wiring box with the 4 screws provided with the scanner.
See figure 16-3 on page 16-4.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
1-5
1–Quick Start
Step 3 — Install ESP-MP1
(ESP-MP is short for Easy Setup Program–Multi-Platform.)
1. Insert your Microscan CD into your computer’s CD drive.
2. Launch Setup.exe under ESP_Software\Multi_Platform and follow the
prompts.2
If downloading from the web:
a. Go to http://www.microscan.com/esp
b. Enter your user name and password.
c. Select ESP-MP and download to your computer hard drive.
d. Extract ESP-MP WinZip files to a directory of your choice.
3. Note where your ESP.exe file is stored on your hard drive.
At the end of the install process, you should see the following icon on your
desktop:
4. Click the ESP-MP icon to start the program.
1. You can also access the scanner through its embedded menus. See Appendix H — “Embedded
Menus.”
2. Contact your sales representative
1-6
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 1 Quick Start
1–Quick Start
Step 4 — Select Scanner Model
When you start the program, the following dialog box will appear:
Note: If you need to select another model later, you can find it under Model Select
in the menu bar.
1. In the model dialog box, select your model.
2. Select the default name, MS-880-1
or type in a new name of your choice.
3. Click Yes when the following dialog
on the right appears.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
1-7
1–Quick Start
Step 5 — Select the Communications Ports
When the following dialog appears:
1. Select 9-Pin Configuration Port or 25-Pin Host Port and click OK.
2. Select your communications port under COM Port.
COM1 is typically used for laptops.
COM1 and COM2 are typically for desktop computers.
3. Click the Start button.
1-8
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 1 Quick Start
After clicking the Start button in the Connecting to... dialog, allow time for the auto
connect routine to test all of the combinations. You will see a blue progress bar fill
across the Connecting to... dialog.
When connected, the CONNECTED message will appear in a green box in the status
bar on the bottom right of the dialog.
Tip: If you do not see either the CONNECTED or DISCONNECTED message at
the bottom of your dialog, try expanding the ESP window horizontally.
Tip: If connection fails, enable a different Com port and try again.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
1-9
1–Quick Start
Step 6 — Connect with Auto Connect
1–Quick Start
Step 7 — Retrieve Scanner Settings
Unless you have unchecked the default Upload After Autoconnect under Options,
the communications values of the scanner will be loaded automatically and displayed
under Scanner Values.
If Upload After Autoconnect is not checked, the scanner values will not be loaded
and ESP communications values will remain displayed under the heading, ESP Values.
Tip: Before doing Retrieve Scanner Settings, you may want to preserve your
current ESP settings to your computer as an ESP file by selecting Save or Save
As in the File menu.
At any time you can retrieve ALL scanner values by:
1. Right-clicking anywhere in the configuration window, and
2. Selecting Retrieve Scanner Settings.
You can also retrieve settings by clicking on the Send/
Receive button.
This is useful if you want to:
• Copy (upload) the scanner’s settings and save them as a computer file for later
retrieval.
• Ensure that whenever you save ESP settings to the scanner you are not saving any
unwanted changes that you or someone else had made previously in ESP. By first
doing Retrieve Scanner Settings, you eliminate that possibility.
1-10
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 1 Quick Start
1–Quick Start
Step 8 — Compare Scanner Settings
If you want to compare settings in the current scanner sideby-side with those in ESP without changing the ESP values:
1. Under the pull down Options menu check Show Comparison Column.
2. Right-click anywhere in the configuration window.
3. Select Retrieve as Comparison.
After a short pause the scanner’s current settings will be
displayed under the Comparison column. Compare those
settings with the ESP values which are displayed under the
ESP Values column.
For example, if you change Background Color to Black,
but haven’t yet saved this to the scanner, you will see the
dissimilar program and scanner values highlighted in blue.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
1-11
1–Quick Start
Step 9 — Position Scanner and Symbol
Set up a symbol at the scanning distance you will be using in your application.
Centerline of
scan window
)
9m
(2.2
90"
)
8m
(1.8
74"
Scan Range Starts Here
2
(1.1
44"
m)
(.89
35 "
m)
4
(.25
10"
20
15
mi
l la
be
mi
l la
10
be
mi
l
l la
7 .5
be
l
l a b m il
el
m)
l
0"
Figure 1-6 Read Ranges
In positioning the scanner and symbols being scanned, consider the following:
• Avoid bright light or IR light from other sources, including other scanners.
• Pitch or skew label or scanner a minimum of ±15° to avoid specular reflection, the
return of direct, non-diffused light.
Note: For additional tips on positioning the scanner and bar code labels, see “Position
Scanner and Bar Code” on page A-28.
Code 39 is the default code type enabled. If you are uncertain as to the symbology
type, enable all codes, by clicking the Utilities menu and enabling Autodiscriminate
under Code Types.
1-12
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
1–Quick Start
Step 10 — Autocalibrate Scanner
Important: To receive bar code data through the 9-pin configuration port, you must
enable the port with the following command: <K146,,1>.
The MS-880 has a software routine that will automatically search and test a range of
focus, gain and tracking settings and select those that achieve the best reads.
1. With a test label in place, start autocalibration by:
a. ESP, clicking the Autocalibration button on the overhead toolbar
and clicking the Auto Cal button to start autocalibration.
b. serial command, sending <@CAL> from a terminal screen
a. embedded menu, opening the autocalibration menu with <@>
and pressing A.
An “Autocalibration in Progress” message will be displayed on your monitor
along with the pass number and information on the focus, gain, and tracking.
2. Allow some time for the scanner to cycle through the focus, gain, and tracking
settings. Do not move or disturb scanner or label while Autocalibration is in
progress. (It might take 2 to 3 minutes to complete.)
3. When completed, the settings that provided the highest read rate will be selected.
You will see one of the following messages: “Autocalibration Passed”, “Autocalibration Failed,” or “Original Settings Were Optimal.”
If autocalibration passes, the scanner sends data to your computer and emits a beep
(if beeper is enabled) for each good read and you will continue to see the read rate
percentage and label data in the window below the scanner image.
Note: If you wish to silence the beeper, interrupt reading by removing or blocking the
test label, or send a <K702,0> command to disable the beeper.
If calibration fails, try the following:
• Check the read range for your particular label density.
• Examine label quality and try a different sample label.
• Slightly skew or tilt the label or scanner to minimize specular reflection.
• Ensure that the correct code type is enabled for the label you are scanning.
Note: See Chapter 6, “Autocalibration” for more details on calibration.
1-13
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
1–Quick Start
Step 11 — Test Range for Bar Code Label
1. Position a label in front of an operational scanner.1
20 mil Code 39 Test Symbol
You can also find test symbols on the
back of the Microscan Marketing CD
jacket. The 20 mil refers to the width
of the narrowest bar (e.g., 7.5 mil =
.0075" or .1905 mm).
2. Click the Utilities button.
3. Right-click Read Rate and select Start.
4. Observe rate in terminal window on the right of
the Utilities screen.
5. Move your bar code label towards the scanner and
away from the scanner until the decode rates drop
off in each direction as shown in figure 1-7.
This will give you a sense of the depth of field
(inner and outer ranges) for your symbol’s density
and range.
6. To end test, right-click Read Rate and select the
Stop button.
Note: If the scanner is in the
default Continuous Read mode
and not in read rate or autocalibration, it will read and beep repeatedly as long as a readable label
remains in the read range and the
read cycle configuration has not
changed.
De
pth
field of
Figure 1-7 Depth of Field
1. If using an I 2/5 label, verify that the number of characters in the label being scanned matches
the code length enabled for the I 2/5 code type (default is 10 and 6). See “Interleaved 2 of 5”
on page 5-14.
1-14
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
1–Quick Start
Step 12 — Make Changes to Configuration and Save
To make changes to a configuration setting:
1. Double-click the setting (for example, End of Read Cycle).
2. Place your pointer in the selection box, scroll down to the setting of your choice
and left-click on the setting.
3. Left-click again anywhere in the configuration window to complete the selection.
4. Right-click in the configuration window and select Save to Scanner to implement the command in the scanner. You have 3 choices:
a. Send, No Save. This initializes all changes in active memory. These changes will
be lost if power to the scanner is cycled.
b. Send and Save. This will cause the scanner to beep, indicating that the change
has been implemented and that all changes have been saved to the scanner’s
NOVRAM for power-on, except factory settings.1
c. Advanced/Send and Save, Including Factory. Same as above, except that
changes to factory settings will also be saved for power-on.
Note: For Multidrop setup, see “Multidrop Communications” on page A-38.
1. Consult your model specific user’s manual for a list of factory settings.
1-15
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
1–Quick Start
1-16
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter
Communications
2
Communications Options ............................................................................ 2-2
Host Port Parameters.................................................................................. 2-5
RS422 Status .............................................................................................. 2-7
Auxiliary Port ............................................................................................... 2-8
Daisy Chain Autoconfigure........................................................................ 2-16
Daisy Chain Remote Scanner ID .............................................................. 2-17
IrDA Port.................................................................................................... 2-18
Menu Mode ............................................................................................... 2-19
This section tells how to setup communications parameters with the host and an auxiliary terminal.
Chapter 1, “Quick Start” told you how to communicate with the scanner through the
9-pin port. This section presents the parameters needed to communicate with the
scanner with the 25-pin Host Port connector or through the internal connections in the
wiring box. In addition, the options for auxiliary port connections are fully explored.
With Microscan’s ESP-MP™ (Easy Setup Program) configuration changes can be made
in the ESP-MP menus, then sent and saved to your scanner. The user can also send
serial commands to the scanner via the ESP’s Terminal window.
Note: The characters NULL <> and , can only be entered through embedded menus,
not through ESP or serial commands.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
2-1
2–Communications
Chapter Contents
Communications Options
Communications Options
You can communicate with the scanner through the following ports:
2–Communications
• 9-pin D-sub external connector
• 25-pin D-sub external connector
• Wiring box
• IrDa port
Only one port can be used at a time to receive commands.
Communications with Host through the 9-pin Host Port
For the 9-pin configuration port, set the host communications settings as follows:
57.6K baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, and None parity. See Chapter 1, “Quick Start”
for more information on using the 9-pin port.
Note: The 9-pin configuration port settings are not changeable.
Communications with Host through the 25-pin Port
The default 25-pin host port configuration settings are as follows: 9600, 7, 1, and Even.
Making changes to these communications parameters without corresponding changes
in linked device(s) can result in the loss of menu access. If this should occur, connect
via the 9-pin port and reset your scanner’s host parameters to match the 25-pin
defaults shown here.
See “Host Port Parameters” on page 2-5.
Communications with Host through the Wiring Box
The settings are the same as those of the 25-pin port. See Chapter 16, “Wiring Box
Option” for details on wiring connections.
Communications with Host through the IrDA Port
See “IrDA Port” on page 2-18 and Appendix C — “IrDA Configuration Port” on page A-13.
2-2
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 2 Communications
Communications by ESP
2–Communications
Click this button to bring
up the Communications
menu.
To change a setting,
double-click the
setting and use your
curser to scroll
through the options.
Communications by Serial Command
Host Port Parameters
old
cmds
Ka
new
cmds
K100,
Aux Port Parameters
Ky
K101,
Command Title
IrDA Port and Text
Daisy Chain Auto Configure
Daisy Chain Scanner ID
Comm. Status Request
KT?
Format
<K100,baud,parity,stop bits,data bits>
<K101,aux port mode,baud,parity,stop bits,data
bits,daisy chain status,daisy chain ID>
<K103,IR status,IR timeout,menu mode>
K103,
K150
<K150DAISY>
DAISY
<K151,daisy chain scanner,daisy chain scanner
K151,
ID>
K199? <K199?>
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
2-3
Communications Options
Communications by Embedded Menu
2–Communications
In addition to ESP-MP, Microscan’s scanners have an embedded menu that can be
accessed from the terminal window within ESP or a separate terminal program. See
for instructions on using the embedded menus. For older, slower computers, the
embedded menus might be a quicker method of communicating with your scanner.
Send a <D> command from your terminal to bring up the main menu:
Press the return key (CR) to see the communications menu:
For information on accessing the embedded menus, see “Embedded Menus” on page 23.
2-4
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 2 Communications
Host Port Parameters
Important: This applies only to the 25-pin port and wiring box connections (not
for 9-pin port).
Note: See “Select the Communications Ports” on page 1-8 for 9-pin host port parameters.
Baud Rate, Host Port
The rate at which the scanner and host transfer data back and forth.
Usage:
Can be used to transfer data faster or to match host port settings.
Serial Cmd:
<K100,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits>
Default:
9600
Options:
1 = 1200
2 = 2400
3 = 4800
4 = 9600
5 = 19.2 K
6 = 38.4 K
7 = 57.6 K
8 = 115.2 K
Parity, Host Port
Definition:
An error detection routine in which one data bit in each character is set to
1 or 0 so that the total number of 1 bits in the data field is even or odd.
Usage:
Only changed if necessary to match host setting.
Serial Cmd:
<K100,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits>
Default:
Even
Options:
0 = None
1 = Even
2 = Odd
Stop Bits, Host Port
Definition:
One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end
of the character.
Usage:
Only changed if necessary to match host setting.
Serial Cmd:
<K100,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits>
Default:
One
Options:
0 = One
1 = Two
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
2-5
2–Communications
Definition:
Host Port Parameters
2–Communications
Data Bits, Host Port
Definition:
One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end
of the character.
Usage:
Only changed if necessary to match host setting.
Serial Cmd:
<K100,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits>
Default:
One
Options:
0 = One
2-6
1 = Two
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 2 Communications
RS422 Status
Enables RS422. When RS422 is enabled, RS232 is enabled.
Usage:
Only changed if necessary to match host setting.
Serial Cmd:
<K100,status>
Default:
Disabled
Options:
0 = Disabled
2–Communications
Definition:
1 = Enabled
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
2-7
Auxiliary Port
Auxiliary Port
2–Communications
As with the host port parameters, the auxiliary terminal’s settings (baud rate, parity,
stop bits, and data bits) must be identical with those of the auxiliary device.
Definition:
An auxiliary port connects the scanner to a remote display or to other
scanners that can display or transfer data.
Usage:
These commands set the communication parameters with the auxiliary
port which can be used to configure menus, send data to the host, display data transmissions originating from the host of the scanner, and
relay data from other scanners set in tandem (daisy chained). If the
scanner’s host port needs to be dedicated to the host, but configuration
must be done on the fly, the auxiliary port can be set to accept configuration changes by Command Processing (page 2-13).
Serial Cmd:
<K101,aux port mode,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits,daisy chain
ID status,daisy chain ID>
Auxiliary Port Modes
Definition:
Determines the flow of data between the auxiliary port device(s), the
scanner, and the host.
Serial Cmd:
<K101,aux port mode,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits,daisy chain
ID status,daisy chain ID>
Default:
Disabled
Options:
0
1
2
3
4
5
2-8
=
=
=
=
=
=
Disabled
Transparent
Half duplex
Full duplex
Daisy chain
Command Processing
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 2 Communications
Transparent Mode
Definition:
• Auxiliary port data to the host is always sent
with a preamble and a postamble.
Scanner
• If the scanner is in a polled mode to the host,
auxiliary port data will still pass through.
• <D> is the only command accepted by the scanner from the auxiliary
port. All other commands will pass through to the host.
Data initiated from the Scanner
• Transmission to the auxiliary port occurs
immediately upon a good read.
Host
• Scan data to the auxiliary port does not include
a preamble or a postamble.
• Communications with the auxiliary port is
always in Point-to-Point protocol, even if the
host is in a polled protocol mode.
Scanner
Data initiated from the Host
• All host data is echoed to the auxiliary port in
unpolled mode.
Aux
Port
Host
Aux
Port
Scanner
Usage:
A common application, in conjunction with handheld scanners, is one
that employs an auxiliary readout to detect mis-applied bar code labels.
Serial Cmd:
<K101,aux port mode,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits,daisy chain
ID status,daisy chain ID>
1 = Transparent
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
2-9
2–Communications
In Transparent mode data is passed between the auxiliary port and
the host. The scanner buffers data from the auxiliary port and echoes
the keyed data on the auxiliary port.
• Auxiliary port data is passed through to the
Aux
host whenever a return key is pressed at the
Host
Port
auxiliary port or whenever bar code data is
sent. If sent with bar code data, it is processed
on a first-in/first-out basis.
Auxiliary Port
Half Duplex Mode
Definition:
In Half Duplex mode all auxiliary port data and bar code data is sent
directly to the host. Bar code data is displayed on the auxiliary port
screen at the same time the data is sent to the host.
Data initiated from the Auxiliary Port
2–Communications
• Auxiliary port data to the host is ignored if the
scanner is in a polled mode.
Host
• Auxiliary port data or scanned data is sent to
the host whenever it is received.
• Auxiliary port data is not echoed.
• Auxiliary port data to the host is always sent
without a preamble or a postamble.
Aux
Port
Scanner
• <D> is the only command that is accepted by the scanner from the
auxiliary port. All other commands are passed through to the host.
Data initiated from the Scanner
• Scan data is transmitted to the auxiliary port at
the same time it is transmitted to the host.
Host
• Data transmission conforms with all parameters specified in the configuration menu (e.g.,
Preamble, Postamble, End of Read Cycle).
Data is initiated from the Host
• All host data is echoed to the auxiliary port in
unpolled mode.
Aux
Port
Scanner
Host
Aux
Port
Scanner
Usage:
Useful when the user wants bar code data displayed on an auxiliary
screen close to the scanner.
Serial Cmd:
<K101,aux port mode,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits,daisy chain
ID status,daisy chain ID>
2 = Half Duplex
2-10
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 2 Communications
Full Duplex Mode
Definition:
In Full Duplex mode all auxiliary port data and bar code data is sent
directly to the host. Bar code data is not displayed on the auxiliary port
screen.
Data initiated from the Auxiliary Port
Host
Aux
Port
• Auxiliary port data or scanned data is sent to
the host whenever it is received.
• Auxiliary port data is not echoed.
Scanner
• Auxiliary port data to the host is always sent
without a preamble or a postamble.
• <D> is the only command that is accepted by the scanner from the
auxiliary port. All other commands are passed through to the host.
Data initiated from the Scanner
• Scan data is not sent to the auxiliary port.
Host
Aux
Port
Scanner
Data initiated from the Host
• All host data is echoed to the auxiliary port in
unpolled mode.
Host
Aux
Port
Scanner
Usage:
When communication to and from the auxiliary port is required.
Serial Cmd:
<K101,aux port mode,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits,daisy chain
ID status,daisy chain ID>
3 = Full duplex
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
2-11
2–Communications
• Auxiliary port data to the host is ignored if the
scanner is in a polled mode.
Auxiliary Port
Daisy Chain Mode
2–Communications
Note: See also “Daisy Chain Autoconfigure” on page 2-27.
Definition:
In a daisy chain application, scanners are connected in tandem or
“daisy chain” and decoded data is relayed from one scanner to another
on up to the host.
A master scanner has its host port linked to the host computer and its
auxiliary port linked to the host port of the first “slave” scanner in the
chain. Thereafter, each slave’s auxiliary port is linked to the host port of
the slave that is further from the host in the daisy chain.
Each scanner in the daisy chain can be assigned an ID that accompanies any data that it sends.
Usage:
Useful in applications where:
• A bar code label might be scanned in both ladder and picket fence directions.
• A bar code label may be present on multiple sides of a package.
• Bar code labels are presented at different depths.
Serial Cmd:
<K101,aux port mode,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits,daisy chain
ID status,daisy chain ID>
Options:
4 = Daisy chain
Function:
Before the master scanner times out, it checks its auxiliary port for
data. It should be set to wait at least 30 mS for each slave in the daisy
chain. (See “Timeout Duration” on page 4-15.) If no data is received
within the read cycle timeout, the master sends a noread message to
the host. Otherwise the complete data is sent.
If for example the master scanner is set to timeout in 120 ms, the first
slave scanner downstream might be set to 90 ms, the next to 30 ms,
and so forth, thus assuring that at least 30 mS elapses between transmissions.a
Daisy-chained scanners can send a series of labels by enabling Multilabel and a common multilabel separator. If the master scanner does not
receive the expected number of labels, noread messages are appended
to the data string to make up the difference between the number of
labels enabled in Multilabel and the number of labels read.
For example, a master and two slave scanners have Number of Labels set
to 3 and Multilabel Separator defined as %. If the master and the first
slave scanner do not find labels, but the next slave scanner registers a good
read, the transmitted results would be: label data % noread % noread.
a. The above example is based on the best case. Other factors such as baud rate, dynamic focus timing,
number of characters in a given symbol, and the number of slaves in the daisy chain can affect timing
and may need to be included in your calculations for complete accuracy.
2-12
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 2 Communications
Conditions:
The conditions for a daisy chain application are
as follows:
1. The master scanner’s trigger must be Serial
or External; the slave scanners’ triggers are
configured for Serial.
2. All scanners are enabled to Daisy Chain
mode.
Host
Slave
Master
4. Each slave scanner in the daisy chain must be set to send its data
no less than 30 mS before its preceding scanner.
5. All but the master scanner must have Postamble enabled and set
to CR (^M) only.
6. All but the master scanner must have their noread messages disabled.
7. If Multilabel is enabled, Multilabel Separator characters must
match in all scanners and Number of Labels must be set to number large enough to include all the labels it may itself read plus the
number of labels that it will be expected to relay to the host or the
next scanner up the line.
8. Symbology ID enable/disable must be the same in all scanners.
9. All but the master scanner must have their diagnostic warning messages disabled.
10. Daisy Chain ID Status enable/disable and the number of characters in Daisy Chain ID must be the same in all scanners.
Command Processing Mode
Definition:
Command Processing allows commands to be entered via the aux port
and direct externally triggered read cycle data in one of two ways:
1. If the last command came from the aux port, then externally triggered read cycle data will be output to both the host and the aux
ports.
2. If the last command came from the host port, then externally triggered read cycle data will only be output to the host port.
Usage:
Allows user to direct externally triggered read cycle data to the host or
both the host and aux ports.
Serial Cmd:
<K101,aux port mode,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits,daisy chain
ID status,daisy chain ID>
Options:
5 = Command Processing
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
2-13
2–Communications
3. Each scanner’s auxiliary port must be connected to the Host port of
its slave scanner.
Auxiliary Port
Aux Port Communications Parameters
As with the host port parameters, the auxiliary terminal’s settings (baud rate, parity,
stop bits, and data bits) must be identical with those of the auxiliary device.
2–Communications
Baud Rate, Aux Port
Definition:
The rate at which the scanner and host transfer data back and forth.
Usage:
Can be used to transfer data faster or match an auxiliary device.
Serial Cmd:
<K101,aux port mode,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits,daisy chain
ID status,daisy chain ID>
Default:
9600
Options:
1 = 1200
2 = 2400
3 = 4800
4 = 9600
5 = 19.2 K
6 = 38.4 K
7 = 57.6 K
8 = 115.2 K
Parity, Aux Port
Definition:
An error detection routine in which one data bit in each character is
set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of 1 bits in the data field is even
or odd.
Usage:
Only changed if necessary to match host setting.
Default:
Even
Options:
<K101,aux port mode,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits,daisy chain
ID status,daisy chain ID>
Serial Cmd:
0 = None
1 = Even
2 = Odd
Data Bits, Aux Port
Definition:
Number of bits in each character.
Usage:
Only changed if necessary to match host setting.
Serial Cmd:
<K101,aux port mode,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits,daisy chain
ID status,daisy chain ID>
Default:
Seven
Options:
0 = Seven
2-14
1 = Eight
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 2 Communications
Stop Bits, Aux Port
Allows the user to select the last one or two bits in each character to
indicate the end of the character.
Usage:
Only changed if necessary to match host setting.
Serial Cmd:
<K101,aux port mode,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits,daisy chain
ID status,daisy chain ID>
Default:
One
Options:
0 = One
1 = Two
Daisy Chain ID Status
Definition:
Each scanner in a daisy chain can be assigned a one or two character
ID that will appear in front of decoded data and identify its source.
Usage:
Used in a daisy chain setup in cases where the host needs to know
which scanner in a daisy chain setup sent the data.
Serial Cmd:
<K101,aux port mode,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits,daisy chain
ID status,daisy chain ID>
Default:
Disabled
Options:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Note: Enable/disable and length must be the same in all scanners.
Daisy Chain ID
Definition:
A one or two character prefix which identifies the particular daisy chain
scanner from which the data is being sent.
Usage:
Used in a daisy chain setup in cases where the host needs to know
which scanner sent the data.
Serial Cmd:
<K101,aux port mode,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits,daisy chain
ID status,daisy chain ID>
Default:
1/
Options:
Any one or two ASCII characters.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
2-15
2–Communications
Definition:
Daisy Chain Autoconfigure
Daisy Chain Autoconfigure
2–Communications
Definition:
Daisy Chain Autoconfigure is issued to the master scanner in the
daisy chain and the software responds as follows:
• Counts the number of slave scanners in the daisy chain.
• Assigns an internal ID number (1...n) to each slave scanner, where
the first slave scanner is number 1 (and it’s own ID being a 0).
• Propagates the communications settings and the relevant operating
modes of the master scanner to the host and auxiliary ports of each
slave scanner.
• Resets each slave scanner.
• Verifies that each slave scanner has acquired the new settings.
Usage:
For quick setup and configuration of the daisy chain network.
Serial Cmd:
<K150DAISY>
Note: All slave scanners must be set to Serial for Daisy Chain to function.
See “Trigger Mode” on page 4-4.
When setting up a daisy chain operation, do the following:
1. Set the master (the scanner connected to the host) scanner to Serial.
This sets all the scanners in the daisy chain to Serial when the command is carried out.
Before Autoconfigure you must set the master scanner to Serial (S):
Host
S
Master
Scanner
S
Slave
Scanner
S
Slave
Scanner
2. Send <K150DAISY> command.
3. If necessary, set the master scanner to Edge.
After Autoconfigure you may set the master scanner to Edge (E)
but the other scanners must remain in Serial (S):
Host
E
2-16
Master
Scanner
S
Slave
Scanner
S
Slave
Scanner
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 2 Communications
Daisy Chain Remote Scanner ID
Note: Scanner IDs can also be assigned in “Daisy Chain Mode” on page 2-20.
Assigns a new daisy chain ID to a daisy chain scanner. The command is
sent to the master scanner to configure the other scanners.
Usage:
This command provides a handy way to assign custom daisy chain IDs
to specific scanners that were assigned during the daisy chain autoconfigure process.
Serial Cmd:
<K151,daisy chain scanner #,scanner ID>
Daisy Chain Scanner Number
Definition:
Specifies the target scanner (by sequential number) which will be
receiving the new Daisy Chain ID. The master scanner is always 0
(zero). All slave scanners are numbered 1...n in the order that they are
connected.
Note: These numbers are for assigning IDs only and are not
changeable.
Serial Cmd:
<K151,daisy chain scanner #,scanner ID>
Options:
1....n (0 for the master scanner)
Daisy Chain Scanner ID
Definition:
A two-character user-defined ASCII message identifying a scanner in
the daisy chain.
Serial Cmd:
<K151,daisy chain scanner #,scanner ID>
Default:
Sequential numbering of scanner units resulting from the Daisy Chain
Auto-configure <K150> command; for example: ID Master = 1/;
ID Scanner 1 = 2/; ID Scanner 2 = 3/; etc.
Options:
Any two characters except , < > NUL.
Note: After a slave scanner accepts a new ID, it automatically invokes a reset-withsave command.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
2-17
2–Communications
Definition:
IrDA Port
IrDA Port
2–Communications
Status
Definition:
IrDA, which stands for the Infrared Data Association, promotes
interoperable, infrared data interconnection standards that support a
walk-up, point-to-point user model for a broad range of appliances,
computing and communications devices.
Usage:
Allows wireless programming of the MS-880 by devices with IrDA ports
such as the Palm Pilot™, laptops, etc. (See Appendix C — “IrDA Configuration Port” of the MS-880 Industrial Bar Code Scanner User’s Manual
and Appendix D — “IrDA/Ir Comm for Palm Pilot” of the MS-880 Industrial Bar Code Scanner User’s Manual.)
Serial Cmd:
<K103,IR status,IR timeout,menu mode>
Note: IrDA port will be disabled automatically whenever the 9-pin host port is in use.
Serial Cmd:
<K103,IR status,IR timeout,menu mode>
Default:
Disabled
Options:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
IrDA Timeout
Definition:
After the loss of the IrDA link, the MS-880 will attempt to re-acquire
the same link until IR Timeout expires, at which time the software
clears the old link and attempts to “discover” any nearby IRDAequipped devices. Until the timeout period elapses, the scanner will not
end the search for the current IRDA terminal even if that terminal is
removed and another IrDA terminal is put in its place.
Serial Cmd:
<K103,IR status,IR timeout,menu mode>
Default:
40 seconds
Options:
0
1
2
3
2-18
=
=
=
=
3 sec.
12 sec.
20 sec.
40 sec.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 2 Communications
Menu Mode
Important Note: Menu Mode is only used in special cases (see “Usage” below). In
normal use the correct mode for your device is automatically selected.
In VT-100 mode, keyboard arrow keys of a VT-100 terminal (or terminal emulation) may be used. TTY uses a teletype protocol.
Note: Send this command from the port to be changed.
Usage:
Only useful in a special cases where a user has a TTY device (desktop
computer, laptop, etc.) and wishes to use the space bar and enter keys
to navigate through the embedded menus.
Serial Cmd:
<K103,IR status,IR timeout,menu mode>
Default:
The IrDA port defaults to VT-100 mode.
Options:
0 = TTY
1 = VT-100
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
2-19
2–Communications
Definition:
2–Communications
Menu Mode
2-20
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter
Protocol
3
Chapter Contents
Protocols are the rules by which devices pass data back and forth. This section
includes the basic options available for data communication, including multidrop and
user-defined options and output data formats.
Note: The characters NULL <> and , can only be entered through embedded menus,
not through ESP or serial commands.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
3-1
3–Protocol
Protocol....................................................................................................3-4
LRC..........................................................................................................3-9
Response Timeout.................................................................................3-10
Intercharacter Delay ..............................................................................3-11
Output Data Format ...............................................................................3-12
Auxiliary/Configuration System Data .....................................................3-14
Network Client .......................................................................................3-15
Protocol by ESP
Click this button
to bring up the
Protocol menu.
3–Protocol
To change a setting,
double-click the
setting and use your
curser to scroll
through the options.
Protocol by Serial Command
Command Title
Host Protocol
Preamble
Postamble
Response Timeout
Intercharacter Delay
LRC
Aux/Config. Port Data
Communications Status
Request
3-2
old
cmds
Kf
Kd
Ke
KA
KB
Kc
new
cmds
K140,
K141,
K142,
K143,
K144,
K145,
K146,
KT?
K199? <K199?>
Format
<K140,protocol>
<K141,status,preamble>
<K142,status,postamble>
<K143,timeout>
<K144,time interval>
<K145,status>
<K146,aux status,config status>
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 3
Protocol
Protocol by Embedded Menu
For information on accessing the embedded menus, see “Embedded Menus” on page
A-23.
From the Main menu, scroll down through the options and select the following screen:
3–Protocol
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
3-3
Protocol
Protocol
Protocols define the sequence and format in which information is transferred between the scanner and the host, or in the case of Multidrop,
between scanners and a concentrator.
Usage:
In general, the point-to-point protocols will work well in most applications. They require no address and must use RS-232 or RS-422 communications standards.
Serial Cmd:
<K140,protocol>
Default:
Point-to-Point
Options:
0 = Point-to-Point
1 = Point-to-Point with RTS/CTS
2 = Point-to-Point with XON/XOFF
3 = Point-to-Point with RTS/CTS & XON/XOFF
4 = Polling Mode D
5 = Multidrop
6 = User Defined
7 = User Defined Multidrop
If selecting one of the options from 0 to 4 (Point-to-Point, Point-toPoint with RTS/CTS, Point-to-Point with XON/XOFF, Point-toPoint with RTS/CTS and XON/XOFF, or Polling Mode D), use the
<K140,protocol> format.
Option 5 through 7 are special cases and discussed later in this section.
3–Protocol
Definition:
Point-to-Point (standard)
Definition:
Standard Point-to-Point requires no address and sends data to the
host whenever it is available, without any request or handshake from
the host.
Usage:
Used only with RS-232 or RS-422.
Serial Cmd:
<K140,0>
3-4
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 3
Protocol
Point-to-Point with XON/XOFF (Transmitter On/Off)
Definition:
This option enables the host to send the XON and XOFF command as a
single byte transmission command of start (^Q) or stop (^S).
Usage:
If an XOFF has been received from the host, data will not be sent to the
host until the host sends an XON. During the XOFF phase, the host is
free to carry on other chores and accept data from other devices.
Used only with RS-232.
Serial Cmd:
<K140,1>
Point-to-Point with RTS/CTS
Point-to-Point with RTS/CTS (request-to-send/clear-to-send) is a
simple hardware handshaking protocol that allows a scanner to initiate
data transfers to the host.
Usage:
A scanner initiates a data transfer with an RTS (request-to-send) transmission. The host, when ready, responds with a CTS (clear-to-send)
and the data is transmitted. CTS and RTS signals are transmitted over
two dedicated wires as defined in the RS-232 standard.
Used only with RS-232.
Serial Cmd:
<K140,2>
Point-to-Point with RTS/CTS & XON/XOFF
Definition:
This option is a combination of Point-to-Point with RTS/CTS and
Point-to-Point with XON/XOFF.
Usage:
Used only with RS-232.
Serial Cmd:
<K140,3>
Polling Mode D
Definition:
Like Point-to-Point, Polling Mode D requires a dedicated connection
to the host; but unlike Point-to-Point, it requires an address and must
wait for a poll from the host before sending data.
Usage:
When in Polling Mode D, an address of 1 is automatically displayed on
the configuration screen. However, during transmission, a 1C hex poll
address (FS) and a 1D hex select address (GS) are substituted for the 1.
Serial Cmd:
<K140,4>
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
3-5
3–Protocol
Definition:
Protocol
Multidrop
Note: See also “Multidrop Communications” on page A-38.
Definition:
Multidrop allows up to 50 devices to be connected to a single RS-485
host, with the scanner assigned an unique address (from 01 to 50).
Usage:
The MS-5000 can be used as a concentrator to a single host port connection.
When Multidrop is selected, the protocol characters for RES, REQ, etc.
are assigned automatically.
Multidrop
Addresses:
Each address has its own separate poll and select address (from 1C to
7F hex).
Options:
01 through 50
Serial Cmd:
If selecting Multidrop (K140,5) an address must be defined and
appended to the command string.
Format: <K140,5,address>
3–Protocol
Note: Scanners linking up to a Microscan MS-5000 multidrop concentrator must be
configured in standard multidrop protocol.
User Defined Point-to-Point
Definition:
User Defined Point-to-Point allows the user to customize the pointto-point protocol.
Usage:
Useful for developing custom protocols in polled or unpolled mode.
Serial Cmd:
<K140,6,RES,address,REQ,EOT,STX,ETX,ACK,NAK,from host>
User Defined Address
Definition:
User Defined is considered to be in a polled mode only if an address
has been assigned.
Serial Cmd:
<K140,6,RES,address,REQ,EOT,STX,ETX,ACK,NAK,from host>
Default:
No address
Options:
Any ASCII character except a null.
3-6
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 3
Protocol
User Defined Example
Definition:
Example: ACK/NAK protocol can be configured using User Defined.
The scanner will transmit data to the host, when an ACK is received, it
will carry on with its business. If a NAK or response timeout occurs, the
scanner will re-send the data to the host up to 3 more times before
aborting.
Tip: To use User Defined Point-to-Point, first select Point-to-Point
<K140,0> and then User Defined <K140,6>.
Example: To select an unpolled ACK/NAK User Defined protocol with
LRC disabled, send <K140,0><K140,6,,,,,,,^F,^U><K145,0>. ACK
and NAK will be displayed in the menu.
Serial Cmd:
<K140,6,RES,address,REQ,EOT,STX,ETX,ACK,NAK,from host>
Default:
No assignment
Options:
Any ASCII character except a null. Control characters can be used to
define RES through NAK in serial commands.
From Host
This option allows the handshaking protocol to be initiated from the
host, if not configured in an unpolled mode. Messages sent to the host
will include the scanner’s defined protocol. The status of From Host
determines if messages sent from the host to the scanner must include
the defined protocol. If From Host is disabled, the defined protocol is
not included. If From Host is enabled, the defined protocol must be
included.
Serial Cmd:
<K140,6,RES,address,REQ,EOT,STX,ETX,ACK,NAK,from host>
Default:
Disabled
Options:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
3-7
3–Protocol
Definition:
Protocol
User Defined Multidrop
Definition:
User Defined Multidrop allows the user to customize the polling protocol.
Usage:
This option is used when connecting to a concentrator or other device
that does not match standard multidrop protocol.
If selecting User Defined Multidrop (7), complete the format by
either choosing new parameters or place commas where unchanged
data fields occur.
Serial Cmd:
<K140,7,RES,address,REQ,EOT,STX,ETX,ACK,NAK>
For User Defined Multidrop, first select Multidrop <K140,5>, then
User Defined Multidrop <K140,7...>.
3–Protocol
Address:
Any single character (02 hex to 7E hex) in the ASCII table can be
assigned as the address character. The character chosen is used as the
poll character and the subsequent ASCII character becomes the select
character. For example, if a ^B (02 hex) is selected as the address, ^C
(03 hex) becomes the select address that the host will use in sending
host select commands.
Note: Any ASCII character except a null (00) and a ^A (01) can be assigned as an
address. Control characters can be used to define RES through NAK in serial commands. (See “Communication Protocol Commands” on page A-22.)
Note: Definitions of commands in User Defined and User Defined Multidrop must
be duplicated in host applications to enable poll and select sequences to execute correctly during transmission.
Note: Typically, parameters in User Defined Multidrop are defined by first enabling
Multidrop, then enabling User Defined Multidrop. This pre-loads multidrop characters into the parameters. Then changes are made to individual characters to match
the host or other requirements.
3-8
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 3
Protocol
LRC
(Longitudinal Redundancy Check)
Definition:
An error-checking routine that verifies the accuracy of transmissions. It
is the exclusive OR of all characters following the STX (start of text) up
to and including the ETX (end of text). What this means is that the
binary representation of all the characters in a transmissions are cumulatively added in a column and each resulting odd integer is assigned a
1 and each even integer a 0 (two 1s = 0, two 0s = 0, a 1 and a 0 = 1).
The extra LRC character is then appended to the transmission and the
receiver (usually the host) performs the same addition and compares
the results.
Usage:
Used when extra data integrity is required.
Serial Cmd:
<K145,status>
Default:
Disabled
Options:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
3–Protocol
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
3-9
Response Timeout
Response Timeout
Time the scanner will wait before timing out if ACK, NAK, and ETX are
enabled, and a host response is expected.
Usage:
Only used when a response is required from the host. While in Multidrop, if the scanner does not receive an ACK or NAK from the host
after sending polled data, it will act on a fault. The scanner can be set
to wait indefinitely by setting Response Timeout to zero.
Serial Cmd:
<K143,response timeout>
Default:
2 (in ten mS increments)
Options:
0 to 255 (A zero (0) setting causes an indefinite wait.)
3–Protocol
Definition:
3-10
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 3
Protocol
Intercharacter Delay
Definition:
The time interval in milliseconds between individual characters transmitted from the scanner to the host.
Usage:
Intercharacter Delay is only used where a host cannot receive data
quickly enough and there is enough time between labels to allow data
to be completely transferred. It is rarely used since any setting other
than zero will slow down communications. For example, a 200 setting
will result in a 1/5 second delay between each character that is transmitted.
Serial Cmd:
<K144,intercharacter delay>
Example: To change Intercharacter Delay to 30 ms, send
<K144,30>.
Default:
0
Options:
0 to 255 (in milliseconds). Zero (0) causes no delay between characters.
3–Protocol
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
3-11
Output Data Format
Output Data Format
Up to four user defined ASCII characters, including control characters can be defined
and added to the front or end of the data string that is sent from the scanner to the
host.
Note: See also Chapter 13, “Output Format and Filtering”.
Preamble Characters
3–Protocol
Preamble Status
Definition:
Define a one to four character data string that can be added to the front
of the decoded data.
Usage:
Useful for identifying and controlling incoming data. For example, defining the preamble as a carriage return and a line feed causes each
decoded message to be displayed of on its own line.
Serial Cmd:
<K141,status,preamble character(s)>
Default:
Disabled
Options:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled (within any protocol)
Preamble Character(s)
Serial Cmd:
<K141,status,preamble character(s)>
Default:
^M corresponding to: carriage return/null/null/null.
Options:
Within a Serial Command
To enter control characters within a serial command, hold down the
control key while typing the desired character.
Example: <K141,1,CNTL-m> to enter ^M
Within an Embedded Menu
Control characters entered on the command line are displayed in the
menu as mnemonic characters, such as: <CR><NUL><NUL><NUL>.
To enter a control character from within an embedded menu, first type
in a space (with the space key). This has the effect of allowing the control key to be recognized as a part of the control character. Next hold
down the control key while typing the desired character.
Example: Space CNTL-m to enter ^M.
3-12
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 3
Protocol
Postamble Characters
Postamble Status
Definition:
Allows the user to enable or disable up to four postamble character(s)
that can be added to the end of the decoded data.
Usage:
Useful for identifying and controlling incoming data. For example, defining the postamble as a carriage return and a line feed causes each
decoded message to be displayed of on its own line.
Serial Cmd:
<K142,status,postamble character(s)>
Default:
Enabled
Options:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled (within any protocol)
Postamble Character(s)
<K142,status,postamble character(s)>
Default:
^M^J. Corresponds to carriage return/line feed/null/null, as displayed
in the menu.
Options:
Up to four user-defined ASCII character, including control characters.
Within a Serial Command
To enter control characters within a serial command, hold down the
control key while typing the desired character.
Example: <K142,1,CNTL-m CNTL-j> to enter ^M^J.
Within an Embedded Menu
Control characters entered on the command line are displayed in the
menu as mnemonic characters, such as: <CR><LF><NUL><NUL>
To enter a control character from within an embedded menu, first type
in a space (with the space key). This has the effect of allowing the control key to be recognized as a part of the control character. Next hold
down the control key while typing the desired character.
Example: Space CNTL-m Space CNTL-j to enter ^M^J.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
3-13
3–Protocol
Serial Cmd:
Auxiliary/Configuration System Data
Auxiliary/Configuration System Data
Note: Do not use this with Daisy Chain operation.
Auxiliary Status
Note: This command only applies if the Aux Mode is set to Command Processing.
See “Command Processing Mode” on page 2-13.
Definition:
When enabled, system data, including decoded data and diagnostic
warning messages, will be routed to the aux port.
Usage:
To check label data and error messages via the aux port.
Serial Cmd:
<K146,aux status,config status>
Default:
Disabled
Options:
0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled
3–Protocol
Configuration Status
Definition:
When enabled, system data, including decoded data and diagnostic
warning messages, will be routed to the 9-pin configuration port or if
active to the IrDA port.
Usage:
To check label data and error messages via the configuration port.
Serial Cmd:
<K146,aux status,config status>
Default:
Disabled
Options:
0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled
When using the 9-pin configuration port it is important to remember to enable this
command.
3-14
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 3
Protocol
Network Client
Network Client is enabled whenever a network protocol card is installed in the MS-880
wiring box and in conjunction with one of the following protocols:
DeviceNet
Profibus-DP
DataHighway Plus
For configuration and installation information on the above protocols and protocol
cards, see The Network Protocol Card User’s Manual, part number 83-210015.
3–Protocol
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
3-15
3–Protocol
Network Client
3-16
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter
Read Cycle/Trigger
4
Chapter Contents
Trigger Mode ...............................................................................................4-4
Serial Trigger .............................................................................................4-10
External Trigger State ...............................................................................4-12
End of Read Cycle ....................................................................................4-13
Multilabel ...................................................................................................4-16
Note: The characters NULL <> and , can only be entered through embedded menus,
not through ESP or serial commands.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
4-1
4–Read Cycle/Trig-
Read cycles and triggering modes are at the heart of bar code scanning. After you’ve
established communications and completed basic read rate testing, you will need to
address the spatial and timing parameters associated with your application. In a typical operation a bar-coded item moves along a line past a scanner. A sensor or timer
activates a read cycle during which the scanner actively searches for bar code symbols. You will need to decide how to initiate the read cycle and how and when to end
it. This section addresses these issues.
Read Cycle/Trigger by ESP
Click this Button to
bring up the Read
Cycle/Triggering
menu.
4–Read Cycle/Trig-
To change a setting,
double-click the
setting and use your
curser to scroll
through the options.
Read Cycle/Trigger by Serial Command
Command Title
Triggering Mode
Serial Trigger Character
External Trigger State
End of Read Cycle
Decodes Before Output
Start Serial Trigger Character
Stop Serial Trigger Character
Multilabel
4-2
old
cmds
Kg
Ki
Kh
Km
KL
new
cmds
K200,
K201,
K202,
K220,
K221,
K229,
K230,
K222,
Format
<K200,trigger mode,filter time>
<K201,character>
<K202,external trigger state>
<K220,end of read cycle status,timeout>
<K221,decodes before output>
<K229,start trigger character>
<K230,end trigger character>
<K222,number of labels,multilabel
separator>
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 4 Read Cycle/Trigger
Read Cycle/Trigger by Embedded Menu
For information on accessing the embedded menus, see “Embedded Menus” on page
A-23.
From the Main menu, scroll down through the options until you reach the following
screen:
4–Read Cycle/Trig-
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
4-3
Trigger Mode
Trigger Mode
Note: When doing autocalibration or read rate testing, the current trigger setting will
be disregarded.
Definition:
The type of trigger event that will initiate the read cycle.
Serial Cmd:
<K200,trigger mode,trigger filter duration>
Default:
Continuous Read
Options:
0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=
Continuous Read
Continuous Read 1 Output
External Level
External Edge
4
5
6
7
=
=
=
=
Serial Data
Serial Data & External Edge
Network Trigger
User Defined Read Cycle
Continuous Read
In Continuous Read, trigger input options are disabled, the scanner
is always in the read cycle, and it will attempt to decode and transmit
every scan crossing a label.
When To Output and Noread options have no affect on Continuous
Read.
Usage:
Continuous Read is useful in testing bar code label readability or
scanner functions. It is not recommended for normal operations.
Serial Cmd:
<K200,0>
4–Read Cycle/Trig-
Definition:
4-4
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 4 Read Cycle/Trigger
Continuous Read 1 Output
Definition:
In Continuous Read 1 Output the scanner self-triggers whenever it
decodes a new bar code label or a timeout occurs.
If End Of Read Cycle is set to Timeout and the label doesn't change,
the scanner will repeat the output at the end of each timeout period.
For example, if Timeout is set to one second, the scanner sends the
label data immediately and repeats the output at intervals of one second for as long as the label continues to be scanned.
If End Of Read Cycle is set to New Trigger, the scanner will send the
current label data immediately, but send it only once. A new label
appearing in the scanner’s range will be read and sent immediately provided it is not identical to the previous label read.
Usage:
Continuous Read 1 Output can be useful in applications where it is
not feasible to use a trigger and all succeeding labels contain different
information. It is also effective in applications where the objects are
hand presented.
Serial Cmd:
<K200,1>
Caution: In automated environments, Continuous Read 1 Output is not recommended because there is no one to verify that a label was missed.
Note: If Trigger is set to Continuous Read 1 Output, Number of Labels will
default back to 1 (if set to any number greater than 1).
4–Read Cycle/Trig-
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
4-5
Trigger Mode
External Trigger Level
Definition:
External Trigger Level allows the read cycle (active state) to begin
when a trigger (change of state) from an external sensing device is
received. The read cycle endures until the object moves out of the sensor range and the active trigger state changes again.
Usage:
This mode is effective in an application where the speeds of the conveying apparatus are variable and the time the scanner spends scanning
each object is not predictable. It also allows the user to determine if a
noread has occurred.
Initiate Read Cycle:
Object # 1, moving in front of the detector
beam, causes a change in the trigger state,
initiating the read cycle.
Associated waveforms assume
External Trigger State is set
to Active On.
End Read Cycle:
The same object, moving out of the detector
beam, causes another change in the trigger
state, ending the read cycle.
Figure 4-1 Trigger Level
4–Read Cycle/Trig-
Serial Cmd:
<K200,2>
Important: Level and Edge apply to the active logic state (Active Off (IOFF) or Active
On (ION)) that exists while the object is in a read cycle, between the rising edge and
falling edge. Rising edge is the trigger signal associated with the appearance of an
object. Falling edge is the trigger signal associated with the subsequent disappearance of the object.
Note: In External Trigger Level, sending a Non-delimited Start Serial Character will
start a read cycle and sending a Non-delimited Stop Serial Character will end it. See
“Start and End Trigger Characters (non-delimited)” in chapter 4.
4-6
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 4 Read Cycle/Trigger
External Trigger Edge
Definition:
External Trigger Edge, as with Level, allows the read cycle (active
state) to begin when a trigger (change of state) from an external sensing
device is received. However, the passing of an object out of sensor range
does not end the read cycle. The read cycle ends with a good read output
or, depending on End of Read Cycle setting, a timeout or new trigger
occurs.
Usage:
This mode is highly recommended in any application where conveying
speed is constant or if spacing, object size, or timeouts are consistent.
Initiate Read Cycle:
Object # 1, moving in front of the detector
beam, causes a change in the trigger state,
initiating the read cycle.
Initiate Second Read Cycle:
Associated waveforms assume
External Trigger State is set
to Active On.
Object # 2, moving in front of the detector
beam, causes another change in the trigger
state. This signal initiates a new read cycle
and ends the previous read cycle unless
Timeout is enabled and a good read or timeout has not occurred.
Figure 4-2 Trigger Edge
Serial Cmd:
<K200,3>
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
4-7
4–Read Cycle/Trig-
Important: Level and Edge apply to the active logic state (Active Off (IOFF) or
Active On (ION)) that exists while the object is in a read cycle, between the rising
edge and falling edge. Rising edge is the trigger signal associated with the appearance
of an object. Falling edge is the trigger signal associated with the subsequent disappearance of the object.
Note: In External Trigger Edge, sending a Non-delimited Start Serial Character
will start a read cycle; however a Non-delimited Stop Serial Character has no
effect. See “Start and End Trigger Characters (non-delimited)” on page 4-10.
Trigger Mode
Serial Data
Definition:
In Serial Data, the scanner accepts an ASCII character from the host
or controlling device as a trigger to start a read cycle. A Serial Data
trigger behaves the same as an External Edge trigger.
Serial commands are entered inside corner brackets, such as <t>.
Usage:
Serial Data is effective in a highly controlled environment where the
host knows precisely when the object is in the scan zone. It is also useful in determining if a noread has occurred.
Serial Cmd:
<K200,4>
Serial Data or External Edge
Definition:
In this mode the scanner accepts either a serial ASCII character or an
external trigger pulse to start the read cycle.
Usage:
Serial Data or External Edge is seldom used but can be useful in an
application that primarily uses an external sensing device but occasionally needs to be manually triggered.
An auxiliary terminal can be connected to the aux port so the user can
send the serial trigger character through the scanner to the host.
Serial Cmd:
<K200,5>
4–Read Cycle/Trig-
Note: In Serial Data or External Edge, sending a Non-delimited Start Serial
Character will start a read cycle; however a Non-delimited Stop Serial Character
has no effect. See “Start and End Trigger Characters (non-delimited)” on page 4-10.
Network Trigger
Definition:
A trigger can also be sent over the network if installed. A network
attribute triggers a pulse that performs similarly to External Edge.
Usage:
Network Trigger allows a network command to be entered from a
host networked to the scanner. See the MS-880 Network Protocol
Card User’s Manual (83-110015).
Serial Cmd:
<K200,6>
4-8
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 4 Read Cycle/Trigger
Trigger Filter Duration
Definition:
Trigger Filter Duration can prevent trigger bounce from falsely triggering the scanner by limiting the time in which trigger pulses can be
received.
Usage:
Trigger Filter Duration is useful where trigger bounce could cause
false triggers.
Serial Cmd:
<K200,trigger mode,trigger filter duration>
Default:
320 (x 31.25 µs = 10ms)
Options:
0 to 65535 (corresponding to 0 to 2.048 s in 31.25 µs steps)
Good Decode Reads
Definition:
The number of decodes (from 1 to 31) required per label before a
label’s decoded data is sent. It requires the scanner to successfully
decode a label a designated number of times (not necessarily consecutively) before it is sent. If it doesn’t achieve the number of good reads
during the read cycle, then a noread will be sent.
Note: Higher settings will decrease throughput speed.
Usage:
This is a very useful feature to increase reliability of reads for symbologies that do not have internal error checking such as Pharmacode.
Serial Cmd:
<K221,decodes before output>
Default:
1
Options:
1 to 31
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
4-9
4–Read Cycle/Trig-
Note: When setting up, be sure to determine if the scanner’s scan rate is capable of
scanning your longest label the required number of times.
Serial Trigger
Serial Trigger
Definition:
A single ASCII host serial trigger character that initiates the read cycle.
Serial Trigger Character is considered an on-line host command and
requires the same command format as all host commands: that is, to
be entered within angle brackets delimiters < >.
Serial Trigger Character (delimited)
Definition:
A delimited trigger character is one that either starts or ends the read
cycle and is enclosed by delimiters such as < >.
Usage:
Allows the user to define the trigger character that initiates the read cycle.
Serial Cmd:
<K201,serial trigger character>
Default:
^] (corresponds to <GS> displayed in the embedded menu)
Options:
Any single ASCII character, including control characters, except NUL
(00H), an existing host command character, or an on-line protocol character. Control characters entered on the command line are displayed in
the menu as mnemonic characters.
Note: Serial Data or Serial Data or Edge triggering mode must be enabled for
Serial Trigger Character to take effect.
4–Read Cycle/Trig-
Start and End Trigger Characters (non-delimited)
Definition:
A non-delimited trigger character is one that either starts or ends the
read cycle and is NOT enclosed by delimiters such as < >.
Both Start and End non-delimited characters can be defined and will
function according to the trigger event, as follows:
When defining Start and End trigger characters, the following rules apply:
• In External Edge the scanner looks only for the Start Trigger Character and ignores any End Trigger Character that may be defined.
• In External Level, the Start Trigger Character begins the read cycle
and End Trigger Character ends it. Note that even after a label has
been decoded and the label data transmitted, the scanner remains in
External Level trigger read cycle until a Stop character is received.
• In Serial Data & Edge trigger mode, command, either a Start Trigger
Character or a hardware trigger can start an Edge trigger read cycle.
Usage:
4-10
It is useful in applications where different characters are required to
start and end a read cycle.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 4 Read Cycle/Trigger
Note: Start and End serial trigger characters can be sent through host ports or aux
ports, but not the IrDA port.
Start Serial Trigger Character (non-delimited)
Definition:
A single ASCII host serial trigger character that starts the read cycle
and is not enclosed by delimiters such as < and >.
Serial Cmd:
<K229,start trigger character>
Default:
Null (disabled)
Options:
Two hex digits representing an ASCII character except <, >, XON and XOFF.
Note: Serial Data or Serial Data or Edge triggering mode must be enabled for
Serial Trigger Character to take effect.
End Serial Trigger Character (non-delimited)
Definition:
A single ASCII host serial trigger character that ends the read cycle and
is not enclosed by delimiters such as < and >.
Usage:
It is useful in applications where different characters are required to
start and end a read cycle.
Serial Cmd:
<K230,end trigger character>
Default:
Null (disabled)
Options:
Two hex digits representing an ASCII character except <, >, XON and XOFF.
Note: Serial Data or Serial Data or Edge triggering mode must be enabled for
Serial Trigger Character to take effect.
4–Read Cycle/Trig-
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
4-11
External Trigger State
External Trigger State
Definition:
When enabled for Active On (ION) (Positive) the triggering device
imposes a current on the optoisolator to activate the read cycle. When
enabled for Active Off (IOFF) (Negative) the triggering device interrupts the current to the optoisolator to activate the read cycle.
Usage:
Allows users to select the trigger state that will operate with their systems.
(If using the Microscan object detector, use Active Off.)
Serial Cmd:
<K202,external trigger state>
Default:
Active On (Positive)
Options:
0 = Active Off (Negative)
1 = Active On (Positive)
4–Read Cycle/Trig-
Note: External Level, External Edge, or Serial Data or Edge trigger mode must
be enabled for External Trigger to take effect.
4-12
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 4 Read Cycle/Trigger
End of Read Cycle
Definition:
The read cycle is the time during which the scanner will attempt to read
and decode a bar code symbol.
Serial Cmd:
<K220,end of read cycle status,timeout>
End of Read Cycle Status
A read cycle can be terminated by a new trigger, a timeout, or a combination of both.
ESP:
Double-click on End of Read Cycle Mode and make a selection.
Serial Cmd:
<K220, end of read cycle status,timeout>
Default:
Timeout
Options:
0 = Timeout
1 = New Trigger
2 = Timeout & New Trigger
Note: When operating in Continuous Read or Continuous Read 1 Output, the
scanner is always in the read cycle.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
4-13
4–Read Cycle/Trig-
Definition:
End of Read Cycle
Timeout
Definition:
Timeout ends the read cycle, causing the scanner to stop reading
labels and send the label data or noread message when the time set in
Timeout elapses (times out), if When to Output is set to End of
Read Cycle.
If in Continuous Read 1 Output, a timeout initiates a new read cycle
and allows the same label to be read again.
With either External Edge, Serial Data, or Serial Data & Edge
enabled, a timeout ends the read cycle and label data or a noread message is sent to the host.
With External Level enabled, the read cycle does not end until the falling edge trigger or a timeout occurs. The next read cycle does not begin
until the next rising edge trigger.
Typically used with Serial or Edge and Continuous One.
It is effective in highly controlled applications when the maximum
length of time between objects can be predicted. It assures that a read
cycle ends before the next bar-coded object appears, giving the system
extra time to decode and transmit the data to the host.
4–Read Cycle/Trig-
Usage:
4-14
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 4 Read Cycle/Trigger
New Trigger
Definition:
New Trigger ends the current read cycle and initiates a new one when
a new trigger occurs. New Trigger refers only to a “rising edge” trigger.
With either External Edge, Serial, or Serial or Edge enabled, an edge
or serial trigger ends a read cycle and initiates the next read cycle.
In the case of External Level, a falling edge trigger ends the read
cycle but the next read cycle does not begin until the occurrence of the
next rising edge trigger.
(See figure 4-1 on page 4-6 and figure 4-2 on page 4-7.)
Usage:
New Trigger is an effective way to end a read cycle when objects
move past the scanner at irregular intervals (not timing dependent).
Note: When New Trigger is enabled, Laser On/Off will have no effect. When
noreads occur, the laser will remain on.
Timeout or New Trigger
Definition:
Timeout or New Trigger is identical to Timeout, except that a timeout or a new trigger (whichever occurs first) ends the read cycle.
Usage:
Useful in applications that require an alternative way to end the read
cycle. For example, if an assembly line should stop completely or the
intervals between objects are highly irregular.
Timeout Duration
Timeout Duration is the time span of the read cycle and is represented in 10 mS increments. It is used in conjunction with External
Edge or Serial Trigger.
Usage:
It is useful in many tightly controlled applications which require a read
cycle to end before the next object appears and therefore need the
flexibility of a timeout adjustment.
Serial Cmd:
<K220,end of read cycle status,timeout>
Default:
100 (Corresponds to one second or 1000 ms.)
Options:
0 to 65535. (Divide any positive number entered by 100 to determine
the time in seconds.)
Note: A minimum setting of 2 is recommended.
Note: Timeout or Timeout or New Trigger under End of Read Cycle must be
enabled for Timeout Duration to take effect.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
4-15
4–Read Cycle/Trig-
Definition:
Multilabel
Multilabel
Definition:
Multilabel allows the user to define up to 12 bar code labels that can
be read in a single read cycle.
Usage:
Multilabel is commonly used in shipping applications where a shipping
label contains individual bar codes for part number, quantity, etc. This
feature allows one trigger to pick up all the labels. AIAG and UCC/EAN128 are two application standards that address this need.
Conditions:
The following conditions apply:
1. Each bar code label must be different to be read.
2. The maximum number of characters in a read cycle is 32,520 for all
labels.
3. The maximum number of characters the scanner can transmit is
calculated by: Preamble + maximum number of labels * (aux id +
symbology id + maximum label length + quality output + ((number
of insertion cells x cell length)+ separator) + postamble + LRC =
37,425.
4. All noread messages are posted at the end of the data string.
5. If more than one label is within the scan beam at the same time,
label data may not be displayed in the order of appearance.
4–Read Cycle/Trig-
6. If Matchcode Type is set to Sequential or if Trigger is set to
Continuous Read 1 Output, Number of Labels will default to 1
(if set to any number greater than 1).
Number of Labels
Definition:
Number of Labels is the number of different labels that can be read in
a single read cycle.
Serial Cmd:
<K222,number of labels,multilabel separator>
Default:
1
Options:
1 to 12
4-16
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 4 Read Cycle/Trigger
Multilabel Separator
Definition:
The character that’s inserted between each label scanned when Multilabel is set to any number greater than 1.
Usage:
Used to delimit or separate data fields with a user defined character.
ESP:
Double-click on Separator and select a character in the popup window.
Serial Cmd:
<K222,number of labels,multilabel separator>
Default:
, (comma)
Options:
Any available ASCII character, except < > NUL.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
4-17
4–Read Cycle/Trig-
Note: If Multilabel Separator has been changed to any other character than the default comma and you wish to re-define the separator as
a comma, use ESP (as shown below) or the embedded menu.
4–Read Cycle/Trig-
Multilabel
4-18
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Codes
Chapter
5
Chapter Contents
Narrow Margins ...........................................................................................5-5
Symbology ID ..............................................................................................5-6
Background Color........................................................................................5-7
Code 39 .......................................................................................................5-8
Codabar.....................................................................................................5-11
Interleaved 2 of 5.......................................................................................5-14
UPC/EAN ..................................................................................................5-17
PDF417 .....................................................................................................5-20
Code 128 ...................................................................................................5-22
UCC/EAN-128 ...........................................................................................5-23
Code 93 .....................................................................................................5-26
Pharma Code ............................................................................................5-27
Autodiscriminate ........................................................................................5-29
This section describes the various bar code symbol types that can be read and
decoded by the scanner.
Code 39 is enabled by default. To enable all codes, right-click Autodiscrimination
under Code Type in the Utilities menu and select Enable, or send a <P> serial command to the scanner from the Terminal window.1
Note: The characters NULL <> and , can only be entered through embedded menus,
not through ESP or serial commands.
See www.aimusa.org/standards for additional information about codes.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
5-1
5–Codes
1. If using an I 2/5 label, verify that the number of characters in the label being scanned
matches the code length enabled for the I 2/5 code type (default is 10 and 6). See “Interleaved 2 of 5” on page 5-14.
Code Types by ESP
Click this button to
bring up the Code
Types menu.
5–Codes
To change a setting,
double-click the
setting and use your
curser to scroll
through the options.
5-2
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 5 Codes
Code Types by Serial Command
old
cmds
new
cmds
Ko
K450,
<K450,narrow margins status,symbology ID status>
Kx
K451,
Code 39
Kp
K470,
Codabar
Kq
K471,
Interleaved 2 of 5
Kr
K472,
UPC/EAN
Ks
K473,
Code 128
Kt
K474,
UCC/EAN-128
Kt
K474,
Code 93
K!
K475,
PDF417
K[
K476,
<K451,background color>
<K470,status,check digit status,check digit output
status,large intercharacter gap,fixed code length status,fixed code length,full ASCII>
<K471,status,start & stop match status,start & stop
output status,large intercharacter gap,fixed code
length status,fixed code length,check digit type,check
digit output>
<K472,status,check digit,check digit output,length
1,length 2,guard bar>
<K473,status,EAN status,supplementals
status,separator status,separator char.>
<K474,status,fixed length,length...>
<K474,,,,UCC/EAN-128 status,output format,separator status,separator character,application identifier
parentheses,record padding>
<K475,status,fixed code length status,fixed code
length>
<K476,status,raster sweeps before decode
attempt,fixed code length status,fixed code length>
<K477,status,fixed code length status,fixed code
length,min. no. of bars,bar widths,fwd/rev>
Command Title
Narrow Margins/
Symbology ID
Background Color
Pharma Code
Code Type Status
Request
K477,
KW?
Format
K499? <K499?>
5–Codes
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
5-3
Code Types by Embedded Menu
5–Codes
For information on accessing the embedded menus, see “Embedded Menus” on page
A-23.
From the Main menu, scroll down through the options until you reach the following
screens:
5-4
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 5 Codes
Narrow Margins
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Allows the scanner to read symbols with quiet zones less than 8 times
the width of the narrow bar element. “Quiet zone” is the space at the
leading and trailing ends of a symbol. Each quiet zone can be as narrow
as only five times the width of the narrow bar element when Narrow
Margins is enabled.
Used when the leading and trailing edges of the symbols are smaller
than the standard margin or other objects encroach into the margins.
<K450,narrow margins status,symbology identifier>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Note: Do not use Narrow Margins with Large Intercharacter Gap enabled in Code
39 or Codabar.
5–Codes
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
5-5
Symbology ID
Symbology ID
Definition:
Symbology ID is an AIM standard prefix character that identifies the bar
code type.
When enabled, the scanner analyzes and identifies the bar code symbology and adds a three character identifying prefix to the data:
1. ] (close bracket character) indicating the presence of a symbology ID
2. A, C, E, F, G, I, L, Q
A = Code 39; C = Code 128 or UCC/EAN-128; E = UPC/EAN; F =
Codabar; G = Code 93; I = I–2 of 5; L = PDF417; Q = Pharma Code
3. Modifier, a single number indicating the status of the check digit
character:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
If Check Digit is not enabled, the output is 0 (Col. 1). If Check Digit
and Check Digit Output are enabled, the output is as shown in Column 2. If Check Digit is enabled, but Check Digit Output is disabled
(Col. 3), the output is as shown in Col. 4, which is the sum of Col. 2 and
Col. 3.
Used when host needs to know the symbology type and how it’s
decoded.
<K450, narrow margins status,symbology identifier>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Example: For Code 39, if Check Digit and Check Digit Output are both enabled, a
1 will be sent; if Check Digit Output is disabled, a 3 (sum of column 1 and column 2)
will be sent.
Table 5-1 Symbology Identifier Option Values
Symbology
Column 1
No check
character
A
C
C
E
F
G
I
L
Q
Code 39
Code 128
UCC/EAN-128
UPC/EAN
Codabar
Code 93
I–2 of 5
PDF417
Pharma Code
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5–Codes
Symbology
I.D.
5-6
Column 2
Check digit
Output
enabled
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
Column 3
Check digit
Output
disabled
2
0
0
0
2
0
2
0
0
Column 4
Sum of
Column
2 and 3
3
0
0
0
3
0
3
0
0
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
FNC 1
Character
in first
position
1
Chapter 5 Codes
Background Color
Definition:
Usage:
Allows the user to choose which symbol background (white or black)
the scanner can read.
If the background is darker than the symbol, then enable black background.
Typically the background is white; but on PCBs for example, they can
be black.
ESP:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
<K451, background color>
White
0 = White
1 = Black
5–Codes
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
5-7
Code 39
Code 39
Definition:
Usage:
An alphanumeric code with unique start/stop code patterns, composed
of 9 black and white elements per character, of which 3 are wide.
Code 39 is considered the standard for non-retail symbology.
Code 39 Status
Serial Cmd:
Default:
<K470,status,check digit status,check digit output status,large intercharacter gap,fixed code length status,fixed code length,full ASCII set>
Enabled
Options:
Note: This is the only code type enabled by default.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Check Digit Status (Code 39)
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
<K470,status,check digit status,check digit output,large intercharacter gap,fixed code length status,fixed code length,full ASCII set>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Check Digit Output (Code 39)
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
5–Codes
Default:
Options:
When enabled, the check digit character is read and compared along
with the label data. When disabled, label data is sent without the check
digit.
Note: With Check Digit Output and an External or Serial trigger
option enabled, an invalid check digit calculation will cause a noread
message to be transmitted at the end of the read cycle.
Check digit Output, added to the bar code symbol, provides additional security.
<K470,status,check digit status,check digit output,large intercharacter gap,fixed code length status,fixed code length,full ASCII set>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
5-8
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 5 Codes
Large Intercharacter Gap (Code 39)
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
When enabled, the scanner can read symbols with gaps between bar
code characters that exceed three times (3x) the narrow element
width.
Large Intercharacter Gap is helpful for reading symbols that are
printed out of specification.
Caution: Do not use Large Intercharacter Gap with Narrow Margins enabled since a large intercharacter gap (over 3x) could cause a
narrow margins (5x) to be interpreted as an intercharacter gap.
<K470, status,check digit status,check digit output,large intercharacter gap,fixed code length status,fixed code length,full ASCII set>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Fixed Code Length Status (Code 39)
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
When enabled the scanner will check the label length against the code
length field. If disabled any length would be considered a valid label.
<K470, status,check digit status,check digit output,large intercharacter
gap,fixed code length status,fixed code length,full ASCII set>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Fixed Code Length (Code 39)
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Specifies the exact number of characters that the scanner will recognize
(this does not include start and stop and check digit characters). The
scanner ignores any code not having the specified length.
Fixed Code Length helps prevent truncations and increases data
integrity by ensuring that only one label length will be accepted.
<K470, status,check digit status,check digit output,large intercharacter
gap,fixed code length status,fixed code length,full ASCII set>
10
1 to 128
5–Codes
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
5-9
Code 39
Full ASCII Set (Code 39
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
5–Codes
Default:
Options:
Standard Code 39 encodes 43 characters; zero through nine, capital “A”
through capital “Z”, minus symbol, plus symbol, forward slash, space,
decimal point, dollar sign and percent symbol. When Full ASCII Set is
enabled, the scanner can read the full ASCII character set, from 0 to
255.
Must be enabled when reading characters outside the standard character set (0-9, A-Z, etc.)
User must know in advance whether or not to use Full ASCII Set
option. Since Full ASCII Set requires two code words to encode one
character, it is less efficient.
<K470,status,check digit status,check digit output,large intercharacter
gap,fixed code length status,fixed code length,full ASCII set>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
5-10
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 5 Codes
Codabar
Definition:
Usage:
Codabar is a 16-character set (0 through 9, and the characters $, :, /, .,
+, and –) with start/stop codes and at least two distinctly different bar
widths.
Used in photo-finishing and library applications. Formerly used in some
medical applications but not typically used in newer applications.
Codabar Status
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
<K471,status,start & stop match,start & stop match output,large
intercharacter gap,fixed code length status,fixed code length,check
digit type,check digit output>
Disabled
0 = Disable
1 = Enabled
Start & Stop Match (Codabar)
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Requires the Codabar start and stop characters (a, b, c, or d) to match
before a valid read can occur.
Used to increase security of symbology.
<K471,status,start & stop match,start & stop match output,large
intercharacter gap,fixed code length status,fixed code length,check
digit type,check digit output>
Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Start & Stop Output (Codabar)
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Causes the start and stop characters to be transmitted with bar code
data.
Used to verify matching.
<K471,status,start & stop match,start & stop match output,large
intercharacter gap,fixed code length status,fixed code length,check
digit type,check digit output>
Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
5–Codes
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
5-11
Codabar
Large Intercharacter Gap (Codabar)
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Instructs the scanner to read symbols with gaps between characters
exceeding three times the narrow element width.
It is helpful for reading symbols that are printed out of specification.
Caution: Do not use Large Intercharacter Gap with Narrow Margins enabled since enabling Large Intercharacter Gap (over 3x)
could cause a narrow margins (5x) to be interpreted as an intercharacter gap.
<K471, status,start & stop match,start & stop output match,large
intercharacter gap,fixed code length status,fixed fixed code
length,check digit type,check digit output>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Fixed Code Length Status (Codabar)
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
When enabled, the scanner will check the label length against the fixed
code length field. If disabled any length would be considered a valid
label.
<K471, status,start & stop match,start & stop match output,large
intercharacter gap,fixed code length status,fixed code length,check
digit type,check digit output>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Fixed Code Length (Codabar)
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
5–Codes
Default:
Options:
Specifies the exact number of characters that the scanner will recognize
(this does not include start and stop and check digit characters). The
scanner ignores any code not having the specified length.
Fixed Code Length helps prevent truncations and increases data
integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted.
<K471, status,start & stop match,start & stop match output,large
intercharacter gap,fixed code length status,fixed code length,check
digit type,check digit output>
10
1 to 128
Note: Fixed Code Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Code Length to take
effect.
Note: Because of symbology limitations, setting Code Length to any number less
than four will produce undetermined results.
5-12
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 5 Codes
Check Digit Type (Codabar)
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Modulus 16:
NW 7:
Allows the user to select the check digit type Codabar will use.
<K471,status,start & stop match,start & stop match output,large
intercharacter gap,fixed code length status,fixed code length,check
digit type,check digit output>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Modulus 16
2 = NW 7
3 = Both
Used in the photo-finishing market.
Used in Japanese markets.
Check Digit Output (Codabar)
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
When enabled, the check digit character is sent along with the bar code
data. When disabled, bar code data is sent without the check digit.
For additional security a check digit can be added to the bar code symbol.
<K471,status,start & stop match,start & stop match output,large
intercharacter gap,fixed code length status,fixed code length,check
digit type,check digit output>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
5–Codes
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
5-13
Interleaved 2 of 5
Interleaved 2 of 5
Definition:
Usage:
A dense, continuous, self-checking, numeric symbology. Characters are
paired together so that each character has five elements, two wide and
three narrow, representing numbers 0 through 9, with the bars representing the first character and the interleaved spaces representing the
second character. (A check digit is highly recommended.)
Important: You must set Code Length in order to decode I 2/5 symbols.
It is has been has been popular because it is the most dense code for
printing numeric characters less than 10 characters in length; however
Microscan does not recommend this symbology for any new applications because of inherent problems such as truncation.
Interleaved 2 of 5 Status
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
<K472,status,check digit status,check digit output status,code length
#1,code length #2,guard bar>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Check Digit Status (Interleaved 2 of 5)
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
An error correcting routine in which the check digit character is added.
It is typically not used but can be enabled for additional security in
applications where the host requires redundant check digit verification.
<K472,status,check digit status,check digit output status,code
length #1,code length #2>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Check Digit Output (Interleaved 2 of 5)
Definition:
5–Codes
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
5-14
When enabled, a check digit character is sent along with the bar code
data for added data security.
<K472,status,check digit status,check digit output,code length
#1,code length #2,guard bar>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 5 Codes
Code Length #1 (Interleaved 2 of 5)
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Allows user to define the symbol length. Because I 2/5 is a continuous
code, it is prone to substitution errors. Hence, a code length must be
defined and a bar code symbol must contain an even number of digits.
Note: If a start, stop or check digits are used, they are not included in
the code length count.
With I 2/5, two code lengths can be defined. When using only one symbol length in an application, setting Code Length #2 to 0 (zero) to
ensure data integrity is recommended.
<K472, status,check digit status,check digit output status,code length
#1,code length #2,guard bar>
10
2 to 128, even.
Since I 2/5 characters are paired, code length must be set to an even
number. If Check Digit is enabled, add 2 to your code length. For
example, if your symbol is 10 characters plus a check digit, then enable
Code Length for 12.
Note: Typically, when printing an I 2/5 label with an odd number of digits, a 0 will be added as the first character.
Note: If both Code Length #1 and Code Length #2 are set to 0, then I–
2 of 5 will be variable.
Code Length #2 (Interleaved 2 of 5)
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Allows user to define a second code length for I–2 of 5.
If using a second symbol, a zero or any even code length from 2 to 64
may be specified. If not using a second symbol, set Code Length #2 to
0 to ensure data integrity.
<K472, status,check digit status,check digit output status,code length
#1,code length #2,guard bar>
6
2 to 128, even.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
5-15
5–Codes
Since I 2/5 characters are paired, code length must be set to an even
number. If Check Digit is enabled, add 2 to your code length. For
example, if your symbol is 10 characters plus a check digit, then enable
Code Length for 12.
Note: Typically, when printing an I 2/5 label with an odd number of digits, a 0 will be added as the first character.
Note: If both Code Length #1 and Code Length #2 are set to 0,
then I–2 of 5 will be variable.
Interleaved 2 of 5
Guard Bar (Interleaved 2 of 5)
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
5–Codes
Default:
Options:
A guard bar is a heavy bar, at least 2 times the width of the wide bar,
surrounding the printed I 2 of 5 symbol and helping to prevent false
reads.
It is useful when I 2 of 5 multilabels are enabled to prevent false data
output. This typically occurs with highly tilted or skewed labels.
<K status,check digit status,check digit output status,code length
#1,code length #2,guard bar>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
5-16
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 5 Codes
UPC/EAN
Definition:
Usage:
UPC (Universal Product Code) is a fixed length numeric, continuous
symbology. UPC can have two or five digit supplemental bar code data
following the normal code. The U.P.C., Version A (U.P.C., A) symbol is
used to encode a 12 digit number. The first digit is the number system
character, the next five are the manufacturer number, the next five are
the product number, and the last digit is the checksum character.
When enabled, the scanner will read UPC version A and UPC version E
only.
Used primarily in POS application in the retail industry. It is commonly
used with Microscan scanners in applications in combination with
Matchcode when there is a need to verify that the right product is
being placed in the right packaging.
UPC Status
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
<K473,UPC status,EAN status,supplementals status,separator status,separator character,supplemental type>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
EAN Status
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
EAN is a subset of UPC. When enabled, the scanner will read UPC version A, UPC version E, EAN 13, and EAN 8. It also appends a leading
zero to UPC version A symbol information and transmits 13 digits. If
transmitting 13 digits when reading UPC version A symbols is not
desired, disable EAN.
Note: The extra character identifies the country of origin.
EAN is the European version of the UPC symbology and is used in European market applications.
Note: UPC must be enabled for EAN to take effect.
<K473,UPC status,EAN status,supplementals status, separator status, separator character,supplemental type>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
5–Codes
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
5-17
UPC/EAN
Supplementals Status (UPC/EAN)
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Disabled:
Enabled:
Required:
A supplemental is a 2 or 5 digit symbol appended to the main label.
When set to Enabled or Required, the scanner reads supplemental
bar code data that has been appended to the standard UPC or EAN
codes.
Reads Supplementals typically used in publications and documentation.
<K473, UPC status,EAN status,supplementals status,separator status, separator character,supplemental type>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
2 = Required
UPC Supplementals will not be decoded.
When enabled, the scanner will try to decode a main and a supplemental. However, if a supplemental is not decoded, at the end of the read
cycle, the main will be sent by itself. The UPC main and supplemental
symbols are considered to be one symbol and will be treated as such.
When set to Required and either the main or supplemental symbol is
not read, a single noread condition results. The UPC main and supplemental symbols are treated as one symbol.
For example, if Supplementals is set to Required, Separator is
enabled, and an asterisk is defined as the UPC separator character, then
the data will be displayed as: MAIN * SUPPLEMENTAL.
Note: Under no circumstances will supplemental symbol data be sent without a main
symbol.
Note: If additional symbols—other than the main or supplemental—will be read in the
same read cycle, Number of Labels should be set accordingly.
Separator Status (UPC/EAN)
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
5–Codes
Default:
Options:
Allows the user to insert a character between the standard UPC or EAN
code and the supplemental code when Supplementals is set to
Enabled or Required.
Allows user to distinguish between the main and Supplemental symbols.
<K473, UPC status,EAN status,supplementals status,separator status,separator character,supplemental type>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
5-18
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 5 Codes
Separator Character (UPC/EAN)
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Allows the user to change the separator character from a comma to a
new character.
As required by the application.
<K473,UPC status,EAN status,supplementals status,separator status,separator character,supplemental type>
, (comma)
Any ASCII character
Note: If Separator Character has been changed to any other character and you
wish to re-define the separator as a comma, you will need to use ESP or the embedded menu.
Note: Whenever Separator Character is defined as a comma (,) sending a
<K473,?> command will return the current definitions including the separator character comma which will appear between two serial separator commas.
Supplementals Type (UPC/EAN)
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Both:
2 Char Only:
5 Char Only:
Allows the user to select 2 character or 5 character supplements, or
both.
As required by symbology used in application.
<K473,UPC status,EAN status,supplementals status,separator status,separator character,supplemental type>
Both
0 = Both
1 = 2 char only
2 = 5 char only
Either 2 character or 5 character supplementals will be considered
valid.
Only two character supplementals will be considered valid.
Only five character supplementals will be considered valid.
5–Codes
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
5-19
PDF417
PDF417
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
A two-dimensional, multi-row (3 to 90), continuous, variable length
symbology that has high data capacity for storing up to 2700 numeric
characters, 1800 printable ASCII characters, or 1100 binary character
per symbol. Each symbol character consists of 4 bars and 4 spaces in a
17-module structure.
Used in applications where a large amount of information (over 32
characters) needs to be encoded within a symbol, typically where the
symbol is transported from one facility to another. For example, an
automobile assembly line might use a single label with multiple fields of
information that will be read at several stations along the way, without
reference to a database.
<K476, status,raster sweeps before decode attempt,fixed code length
status,fixed code length>
PDF417 Status
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
<K476, status,raster sweeps before decode attempt,fixed code length
status,fixed code length>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Fixed Code Length (PDF417)
Definition:
5–Codes
Usage:
When enabled, the PDF label must contain the same number of characters as the code length setting before it can be considered a good
decode. The scanner will ignore any code not having the specified
length.
Used to increase data integrity by ensuring that only one label length
will be accepted.
5-20
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 5 Codes
Fixed Code Length Status (PDF417)
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
<K476, status,raster sweeps before decode attempt,fixed code
length status,fixed code length>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Fixed Code Length (PDF417)
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Specifies the exact number of characters the scanner will recognize.
<K476, status,raster sweeps before decode attempt,fixed code length
status,fixed code length>
10
1 to 2710
Note: Fixed Code Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Code Length to take
effect.
5–Codes
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
5-21
Code 128
Code 128
Definition:
Usage:
A very dense alphanumeric symbology. It encodes all 128 ASCII characters, it is continuous, has variable length, and uses multiple element
widths measured edge to edge.
Code 128 is a smaller code useful in applications with tight spots and
high security needs.
Code 128 Status
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
<K474, status,fixed code length status,fixed code length>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Fixed Code Length Status (Code 128)
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
When enabled the scanner will check the label length against the code
length field. If disabled any length would be considered a valid label.
<K474, status,fixed code length status,fixed code length>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Fixed Code Length (Code 128)
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
It specifies the exact number of characters that the scanner will recognize (this does not include start and stop and check digit characters).
The scanner ignores any code not having the specified length.
Fixed Code Length helps prevent truncations and increases data
integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted.
<K474, status,fixed code length status,fixed code length>
10
1 to 128
5–Codes
Note: Fixed Code Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Code Length to take
effect.
5-22
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 5 Codes
UCC/EAN-128
Definition:
Usage:
A subset of Code 128, with extended features.
See the Uniform Code Council, Inc. at www.uc-council.org.
Used as a standard for shipping labels.
Note: Code 128 must be Enabled for UCC/EAN-128 to function.
UCC/EAN-128 Status
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Enabled:
Required:
<K474,,,,UCC/EAN-128 status,output format,application record separator status,application record separator character,application record
brackets,application record padding>
Note: Code 128 serial command fields for K474 precede UCC/EAN-128.
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
2 = Required
If Enabled, the scanner can read labels with or without a function 1
character in the first position.
If set to Required, the label must have a function 1 in the first position
and conform to EAN format in order to decode the bar code symbol.
Output Data Format (UCC/EAN-128)
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Standard:
Application
Record:
Note: If an illegal Application Record format is detected, the scanner will process it
as a noread and output a noread message (if enabled).
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
5-23
5–Codes
Offers an option between Standard UCC/EAN-128 and Application
Record format.
Application Record is useful in applications in which the software can
utilize application record formatting to help automate the processing of
its UCC/EAN-128 data.
<K474,,,,UCC/EAN-128 status,output format,application record separator status,application record separator character,application record
brackets,application record padding>
Standard
0 = Standard
1 = Application Record
In Standard UCC/EAN-128 application identifiers and data fields are
sent, but none of the formatting (separators, parentheses, padding)
will be included.
Application Record is a variation of UCC/EAN-128 that allows the user
to define separators between data fields, enclose application identifiers
in parentheses, and enable padding (zeros) for variable length fields.
UCC/EAN-128
Application Record Separator Status (UCC/EAN-128)
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
When enabled, a separator character is inserted between application
records.
<K474,,,,UCC/EAN-128 status,output format,application record
separator status,application record separator character,application
record brackets,application record padding>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enable
Note: Output Format must be set to Application Record before this parameter can
take effect.
Application Record Separator Character (UCC/EAN-128)
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Allows the user to define an ASCII character as an application record
separator.
<K474, ,,,UCC/EAN-128 status,output format,application record separator status,application record separator character,application
record brackets,application record padding>
, (comma)
User Defined ASCII character
Note: Output Format must be set to Application Record before this parameter can
take effect.
Application Record Brackets (UCC/EAN-128)
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
When enabled, parentheses ( ) are added to enclose application identifiers.
<K474, ,,,UCC/EAN-128 status,output format,application record separator status,application record separator character,application record
brackets,application record padding>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
5–Codes
Note: Output Format must be set to Application Record before this parameter can
take effect.
5-24
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 5 Codes
Application Record Padding (UCC/EAN-128)
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Padding is the insertion of zeros to make up the maximum length of a
variable application record data field, except for the last field which
does not require padding.
When enabled, padding is included. When disabled, padding is omitted.
Note: Padding is never added to fixed length fields or to the last data
field of a label. Enabling or disabling Record Padding will have no
effect on these.
<K474,,,,UCC/EAN-128 status,output format,application record separator status,application record separator character,application record
brackets,application record padding>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Note: Output Format must be set to Application Record before this parameter can
take effect.
5–Codes
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
5-25
Code 93
Code 93
Definition:
Usage:
Code 93 is a variable length, continuous symbology employing four element widths. Each Code 93 character has nine modules that may be
either black or white. Each character contains three bars and three
spaces.
Used occasionally in clinical industry.
Code 93 Status
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
<K475, status,fixed code length status,fixed code length>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Fixed Code Length Status (Code 93)
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
When enabled the scanner will check the label length against the code
length field. If disabled any length would be considered a valid label.
<K475, status,fixed code length status,fixed code length>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Fixed Code Length (Code 93)
Definition:
Usage:
5–Codes
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Specifies the exact number of characters that the scanner will recognize
(this does not include start and stop and check digit characters). The
scanner ignores any code not having the specified length.
Fixed Code Length helps prevent truncations and increases data
integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted.
<K475, status,fixed code length status,fixed code length>
10
1 to 128
5-26
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 5 Codes
Pharma Code
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
The bar code encodes up to five different numbers, each with its own
color which may be entered in decimal or "binary" format with a 1 represented by a thick bar and a 0 represented by a thin bar. Bar width is
independent of height.
In decimal format, each part can be up to 999999.
In binary format, each input have up to 19 ones and zeros.
Pharma Code is used mostly with packaging for the pharmaceuticals
industry.
<K477,status,fixed code length status,fixed code length,min. no. of
bars,bar widths,fwd/rev>
Note: It is recommended that you disable AGC before enabling Pharma Code.
Pharma Code Status
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
<K477,status,fixed bar length status,fixed bar length,min. no. of
bars,bar widths,fwd/rev>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Fixed Bar Length Status (Pharma Code)
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
<K477, status,fixed bar length status,fixed bar length,min. no. of
bars,bar widths,fwd/rev>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Fixed Bar Length (Pharma Code)
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
<K477, status,fixed bar length status,fixed bar length,min. no. of
bars,bar widths,fwd/rev>
10
4 to 16
5–Codes
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
5-27
Pharma Code
Minimum Number of Bars (Pharma Code)
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
<K477,status,fixed bar length status,fixed bar length,min. no. of
bars,
bar widths,fwd/rev>
4
4 to 16
Bar Widths (Pharma Code)
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
<K477,status,fixed bar length status,fixed bar length,min. no. of bars,
bar widths,fwd/rev>
Mixed
0 = Mixed
1 = Narrow
2 = Wide
Forward/Reverse Decoding Direction (Pharma Code)
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
5–Codes
Default:
Options:
Specifies the direction that a bar can be read.
<K477,status,fixed bar length status,fixed bar length,min. no. of bars,
bar widths,fwd/rev>
Forward
0 = Forward
1 = Reverse
5-28
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 5 Codes
Autodiscriminate
Although Autodiscriminate is not a configuration command, but it is included here
as a convenient tool for enabling most code types.
Definition:
Usage:
ESP:
ESP:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Enables all available symbology types except PDF417, UCC/EAN 128,
and Pharma Code. The user may also individually disable/enable each
symbology type.
Commonly used for quick setup mode to detect bar code type. This is
particularly useful for users who might be unfamiliar with their application’s symbology.
Note: It does not alter individual fields such as Start/Stop, Fixed
Length, etc. These need to be setup individually.
To enable all codes, click the Autodiscrimination button in the
Advanced Calibration menu, or type in <P> in the Terminal screen.
In the Utilities menu, right-click on Autodiscriminate and select
Enable.
Note: There will be a few seconds delay while the scanner values are
retrieved.
<P>
Code 39 (only)
<P> Enables all codes except noted above.
<Q> Enable Code 36 only
Note: If using an I 2/5 label, verify that the number of characters in the label being
scanned matches the code length enabled for the I 2/5 code type (default is 10 and 6).
See “Interleaved 2 of 5” on page 5-14.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
5-29
5–Codes
<R> Enable Codabar only
<S> Enable I 2/5 only
5–Codes
Autodiscriminate
5-30
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
6
Chapter Contents
Overview of Autocalibration .....................................................................6-2
Autocalibration by ESP ............................................................................6-4
Autocalibration by Serial Command.........................................................6-7
Autocalibration by Embedded Menu ........................................................6-8
The purpose of autocalibration is to optimize the scanner’s optical settings (focus,
gain, and tracking) to obtain the highest read rates in one or several label positions as
required by the user’s application. This section includes the overall steps in autocalibration and specific steps for autocalibration by ESP, serial command,
and embedded menus. For most applications autocalibration is the only optical
setup required.
Changes to motor speed, focus, speed, gain, tracking, and AGC can also be made
individually by manual command.
Autocalibration Methods
There are three ways to access autocalibration:
1. ESP Autocalibration menu.
2. Serial command <@CAL>.
3. Embedded menu <@>.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
6-1
6–Autocalibration
Autocalibration
Chapter
6–Autocalibration
Overview of Autocalibration
Overview of Autocalibration
When an autocalibration command is sent, the scanner first steps through a coarse
grid of focus settings, looking for readable bar code symbols, and recording the highest read rates it encounters. This is “Pass 1,” as shown by the blue line in figure 6-1, a
screen capture of an actual autocalibration routine in ESP. On “Pass 2” (red line) it
returns to the focus position where it found the best read rate and steps through a
finer grid of focus, gain and tracking settings. The software evaluates the results and
selects the best data. If it passes, it displays an “Autocalibration Passed” message at
the top of the window.
Figure 6-1 Typical Autocalibration Graph
6-2
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 6 Autocalibration
Follow this procedure for all three methods of autocalibration:
1. Set your scan rate at the appropriate speed for your application.
2. Position your bar code symbol at the distance used in your application and confirm
that it is at a distance within the specifications for that symbol size (see “Position
Scanner and Symbol” on page 1-12).
3. If you are not certain of the code type, enable all code types by sending a <P>
command from the terminal window, or clicking on the Autodiscrimination button in Calibration/Advanced in ESP.1
4. Start the autocalibration procedure.
Note: Once a successful autocalibration is completed, you may want to save
those setting to the calibration database (see Chapter 7, “Calibration Database”).
5. Repeat autocalibration at other ranges and/or label types you might be scanning
in your application.
6. Check your readings at each
end of the scan width
required for your application, keeping in mind that
the scan width testing may
not produce results that are
entirely symmetrical.
Note: If you are setting up
for Laser Framing (see
page 9-6), be sure that you
only test for autocalibration
in the active areas of the
scan beam.
7. To save the new settings
(including focus, gain, and
tracking) for power-up,
send a <Zp> command.
Figure 6-2 Autocalibration Setup
Note: To silence the beeper, send <K702,0> or remove or block the test label.
After autocalibration has passed, the scanner will beep once, automatically exit the
autocalibration routine and begin scanning for a label in Continuous Read mode,
beeping for each good read.
1. Note: If using an I 2 of 5 label, verify that the number of characters in the label being
scanned matches the code length enabled for the I 2 of 5 code type (default is 10 and 6). See
“Interleaved 2 of 5” on page 5-14.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
6-3
6–Autocalibration
Autocalibration Steps
6–Autocalibration
Autocalibration by ESP
Autocalibration by ESP
1. Click on the Autocalibration button on the overhead toolbar.
2. Click on the Auto Cal button to start autocalibration.
An Autocalibration in
Progress message will be
displayed on your monitor
along with the pass number
and information on the focus,
gain, and tracking.
Allow some time for the scanner to cycle through the
focus, gain, and tracking settings. Do not move or disturb
scanner or label while Autocalibration is in progress. (It
might take 2 to 3 minutes to
complete.)
3. When completed, the settings
that provided the highest
read rate will be selected. You
will see one of the following
messages: Autocalibration
Passed, Autocalibration
Failed, or Original Settings Were Optimal.
Figure 6-3 Autocalibration In Process
If it passes, you will continue to see the read rate
percentage and label data in
the window below the scanner image.
Note that in the figure 6-4
the focus position remains
the same as it was in figure
6-3, but the Gain and
Tracking have been finetuned during the second
pass.
The graph in figure 6-4 shows
the results of this procedure.
Figure 6-4 Autocalibration Passed
6-4
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 6 Autocalibration
In the advanced tab in the Autocalibration menu you can constrain the scan width of
the scan beam with Laser Framing and set up the rules the scanner will follow when
making the first pass of the autocalibration procedure.
Laser Framing
Sets the length of time the laser is ON during each scan so that only a selected portion of the scan width is effectively scanned.
To adjust the scan width:
1. First click on Framing Status.
2. Click on the pointers in Laser Off and
Laser On to adjust the shape of your
scan beam width to match only the
area in which your bar code symbol
will appear.
Focus Stepping
After you’ve used autocalibration a time or
two and observed the progress of the first
and second passes in the graph and table
in the Results tab, you will sense the
relationship between focus position and
the distance to the bar code symbol. See
figure 6-7 for a table on this.
To improve the speed and accuracy of your
autocalibration setup:
1. Click on the Advanced tab in the
Autocalibration menu.
2. If Auto Range is enabled, click on it to
disable it.
3. From previous results, estimate the
value of Starting Focus Position and
drop down one or two positions.
For example, if you estimate the distance to your label to correspond to a Starting Focus Position of 6, enter 5 or 4 to be certain of not missing the peak performance distance.
4. Enter a value in Focus Step Size.
This is the number of focus increments that will be stepped through during the
first autocalibration pass. The range is 2 to 5. The higher values will result in
fewer readings during the first pass but will increase the risk of missing the peak
performance position.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
6-5
6–Autocalibration
Advanced ESP Autocalibration Features
6–Autocalibration
Autocalibration by ESP
Auto Range
Enabling Auto Range will improve speed, but with a caveat. With Auto Range, the
scanner will focus outward until it senses an object by signal strength and begin looking for a decodable symbol from there. This will result in quicker acquisition, but only
if other objects closer to the scanner are not mistaken for the bar-coded object.
Again, the user should experiment with this routine until satisfactory results are
achieved. In any case, you can observe the Results tab and determine whether Auto
Range will work smoothly with your application.
To use Auto Range:
1. Make certain that no extraneous objects that might fall within the scan beam are
between the bar code symbol and the scanner.
2. Click on the Advanced tab in the Autocalibration menu.
3. If Auto Range is not enabled, click on it to enable it.
4. Click on the Auto Cal button to start autocalibration.
6-6
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 6 Autocalibration
Note: Autocalibration by Serial Command is useful for quick calibration; however,
to do autocalibration and save your settings to the Configuration Database, or to
make changes to related parameters, see “Autocalibration by ESP” on page 6-4 or
“Autocalibration by Embedded Menu” on page 6-8.
For a quick calibration of your label, send the <@CAL> serial command (see “Autocalibrate Scanner” on page 1-13 for details) and observe the results.
For example, an attempt to autocalibrate a bar code symbol yielded the following
results:
It was well within the recommended range for that size label (see “Position Scanner
and Symbol” on page 1-12) yet it failed to decode.
To find out if a code type other than Code 39 was being used, a <P> command was
sent to enable all codes and the <@CAL> command was repeated.
This time it passed:
Note: A user can abort autocalibration at any time by pressing the ESC key on the
terminal. No other keystroke has any effect while in Autocalibration.
Saving for Power-up
To save focus, tracking, and gain settings changed in Autocalibration for power-up,
send <Zp>.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
6-7
6–Autocalibration
Autocalibration by Serial Command
6–Autocalibration
Autocalibration by Embedded Menu
Autocalibration by Embedded Menu
To calibrate via the embedded Autocalibration menu, do the following:
1. Place the sample label at a fixed position in the center of the read range being tested.
2. Enter Autocalibration menu by sending an <@> command from a terminal.
Figure 6-5 Embedded Autocalibration Setup Menu
3. If the application requires a change in scan rate, do the motor speed adjustment
now with the M or N commands.
Note: All single letter commands must be entered in upper case.
4. Start Autocalibration by typing an upper case A from your terminal while in the
calibration menu.
Note: A user can abort autocalibration at any time by pressing the ESC key on
the terminal. No other keystroke has any effect while in Autocalibration.
5. Wait for Autocalibration to cycle through its settings.
An “Autocalibration in Progress” message will be displayed. A new text line will
appear below the menu displaying the progress of the autocalibration.
6. As with the serial command, repeat the routine at other positions in your scan
range and width and save each position to the Configuration Database.
7. If not successful an “Autocalibration Failed” message will be displayed. If successful an “Autocalibration Passed” message as shown in the above menu will be displayed along with other settings.
6-8
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 6 Autocalibration
Scanner Settings
Motor Speed, Gain Setting, and Tracking adjustments affect the read performance. Focus controls a stepper motor that physically slides a lens back and forth to
control focal length. These settings are adjusted automatically in autocalibration.
The status of these parameters is displayed on the bottom line of the menu under
Motor, Gain, Track, and Focus (see “Overview of Optoelectrics” on page 8-4. These
settings are incremented or decremented by pressing the indicated key shown on the
menu. PDF-417 Decode, AGC Status, Laser Power, and Raster Status use single
commands to toggle between states.
AGC Status
Typing S toggles AGC between Enable/Disable, as displayed on a the status line
near the bottom of the menu. With AGC disabled this value is simply the Gain setting.
However, with AGC enabled, this value represents the gain the scanner has to set to
maintain the desired signal amplitude. If a label is in close, the AGC level should be a
small value because the scanner does not need much gain to achieve the desired signal amplitude. However, as a label gets farther away from the scanner, this value will
increase to maintain the signal amplitude.
Laser Power
Typing L toggles between High and Low laser settings. See “Laser Power” on page 98 for details.
PDF417 Decode Test
Typing D toggles the PDF417 Decode Test between Enable/Disable, as displayed
on a the status line near the bottom of the menu. Once set to Enabled, PDF417 only
is enabled and a special test mode is enabled that displays the decodes per second of
a full PDF417 label. While autocalibration is not performed in this mode, you can still
adjust settings manually.
This special read rate will remain enabled until the Autocalibration menu is exited or
PDF417 is disabled with another D command.
Note: This mode averages decode and capture time over a series of readings, thus
assuring for a smooth read-rate output, but at the cost of delayed reaction to label
movement and user setting changes.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
6-9
6–Autocalibration
Note: Focus positions Inside, Outside and Set posted near the bottom of the above
menu are explained more fully in “Calibration Results Embedded Menu” on page 6-11.
Note: If you are using the 9-pin configuration port and doing autocalibration by serial
command or embedded menus, you will be able to view scanned bar code data in the
menu, but upon exiting the autocalibration menu, you will not be able to see bar code
data without sending the following command: <K146,,1>. If using the ESP, this is
not necessary.
6–Autocalibration
Autocalibration by Embedded Menu
Autocalibration Menu Options
START Autocalibration
Typing A initiates an Autocalibration sequence. Once entered, no other keystrokes
will be accepted with the exception of the ESC key, which terminates the routine.
RECALL Initial Settings
Typing B restores the original settings that were present upon entering the Autocalibration Setup Menu. These settings include Motor Speed, Gain, Tracking, and
Focus.
SAVE Settings to Database
Typing C saves the current Gain, Tracking, and Focus settings to the Configuration Database. The database is made up of indexes 1 through 7. Current settings will
be saved to the first open index. See Chapter 8, “Optoelectrics.”
EXIT Calibration Setup menu
To exit the Autocalibration Setup menu, press the ESC key. The following prompt
will be displayed:
“Do you want to save calibration settings for power on? (Y=yes N=no).”
Typing Y will cause the current settings in the Calibration Setup menu to be saved
to Flash Memory for recall when the scanner is powered up at a later date. These settings include Motor Speed, Gain, Tracking, Focus, AGC Status, Laser Power, and
Raster Status. Entering N will cause the scanner to be reset without saving the settings to Flash memory.
Menu Selections
Typing 1 will take you to the Calibration Results menu (page 6-11).
Typing 2 will take you to the Raster/Laser Framing Setup menu (page 9-9).
Typing 3 will take you to the Configuration Database menu (page 7-6).
Typing 4 will take you to the Advanced Setup menu (page 6-12).
6-10
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 6 Autocalibration
To access Calibration Results menu from within the Autocalibration Setup menu,
(figure 6-5 on page 6-8) type the number 1.
Figure 6-6 Embedded Calibration Results Menu
The Calibration Results menu (an example shown here) shows the results of the
autocalibration process for Read Rate, Gain, and Tracking both the first and second
passes. Note that the first pass has only one reading for each parameter.
Focus Positions
In the example above, the focus position selected from the first calibration pass (position 26) represents the optimal focus position for Read Rate, Gain, and Tracking.
The second “fine tune” pass commences 3 focus positions in from this and steps out
until the read rate drops off to zero.
Focal Range
The algorithm selects the best focus position (SET) as the midpoint between those
positions (IN and OUT) at which read rates drop off by no more than 6-2/3 percent of
the maximum read rate. For example, in the above menu, the read rate for focus
position 24 is 73. Since 73 is more than 6-2/3% below the maximum read rate of
100% shown elsewhere, the IN range falls under the next focus position, 25. A mirrored calculation is performed to locate the OUT focal range.
Press the enter key (CR) to return to the main calibration menu or Esc to leave the
Auto Calibration Setup menu entirely.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
6-11
6–Autocalibration
Calibration Results Embedded Menu
6–Autocalibration
Autocalibration by Embedded Menu
Advanced Autocalibration Setup Embedded Menu
The Advanced Autocalibration Setup menu allows you to change the starting focus
position and the number of focus steps during the first pass.
For example, if you are preparing to do autocalibration on labels whose minimum distances from the scanner is 40 inches, there is no reason for autocalibration to cycle
through all of the focal positions inside 40 inches. Figure 6-7 includes a table that
associates several starting focus positions with minimum label distances from the
scanner. Use this table to estimate your starting focus position.
To increase Starting Focus Position, type T. To decrease it, type R.
To increase the First Pass Focus Step, type G. To decrease it, type F.
Increasing First Pass Focus Step will speed up the autofocus process, but can also
cause autofocus to skip over a bar code symbol and not decode it.
Note: All single letter commands must be entered in upper case.
Figure 6-7 Advanced Autocalibration Menu
Auto Range is disabled by default. To enable, press A. See page 6-6 for an explanation of auto range.
6-12
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Calibration
Database
Chapter
7
Overview of Calibration Database ...............................................................7-2
Calibration Database by ESP ......................................................................7-3
Calibration Database by Serial Command ..................................................7-4
Calibration Database by Embedded Menu..................................................7-6
This section explains the database setup for storing the optical settings derived from
autocalibration.
Note: The characters NULL <> and , can only be entered through embedded menus,
not through ESP or serial commands.
Calibration Database by Serial Command
Command Title
Optoelectric Calibration
Database
old
cmds
new
cmds
K227,
Format
<K227,database index,focus position,
gain,tracking>
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
7-1
7–Calibration Data-
Chapter Contents
Overview of Calibration Database
7–Calibration Data-
Overview of Calibration Database
Definition:
The configuration database allows the user to save up to seven opticalelectrical settings. The database can be used simply to save most commonly used settings to make the scanner easily adaptable to changing
applications.
Usage:
Useful in applications where a variety of optical-electrical settings are
required to read and decode more than one label type, position, etc.
Serial Cmd:
<K227,database index,focus position,gain,tracking>
Indexes of optical settings can be entered either as individual optical settings or as a
index of settings obtained from the autocalibration procedure. They can be entered in
three ways:
• by ESP in the calibration database menu
• by serial commands
• by Embedded menu commands
Calibration with Multilabel
With Multilabel enabled for more than one label, the scanner may not locate labels at
varying ranges. The reason for this is that once a label is located from the optical
database, the scanner will continue to search for labels that meet that index of focus,
tracking, and gain settings.
7-2
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 7 Calibration Database
Calibration Database by ESP
To Load the current settings obtained from autocalibration into the database:
Perform the autocalibration procedures described in “Autocalibration by ESP” on page
6-4.
and the Database tab as shown in
2. Move the Database Index Indicator to the Index of your choice by clicking on
the arrows in the Database Index Selector.
3. Click on the Load Current to Database button.
This will put the Focus, Gain, and Tracking settings that reside in the Main tab
into the database index.
4. Repeat this procedure for other indexes.
Database
Index
Indicator
Database
Index
Selector
Figure 7-1 Database Menu
You can also enter in individual values in any of the seven indexes by double-clicking anywhere on the index row and making changes in the popup window, or by
returning to the Main tab in Autocalibration and typing in the values of your choice.
Database index settings can be applied later in operation. See Chapter 8, “Optoelectrics.”
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
7-3
7–Calibration Data-
1. Click on autocalibration menu
figure 7-1.
Calibration Database by Serial Command
Calibration Database by Serial Command
Note: The Configuration Database is best developed from the ESP Calibration menu.
7–Calibration Data-
Database Index
Definition:
Stores up to 7 user defined database records that can be entered or set
from autocalibration and retrieved dynamically. See "Overview of Optoelectrics" on page 8-4 for instructions on setting up the database.
Serial Cmd:
<K227,database index,focus position,gain,tracking>
Options:
1 to 7
Focus Position
Definition:
Associates a specific focus position with a database index.
Serial Cmd:
<K227,database index,focus position,gain,tracking>
Options:
0 to 40
Gain
Definition:
Associates a specific gain setting with a database index.
Serial Cmd:
<K227,database index,focus position,gain,tracking>
Options:
0 to 255
Tracking
Definition:
Associates a specific tracking setting with a database index.
Serial Cmd:
<K227,database index,focus position,gain,tracking>
Options:
0 to 127
7-4
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 7 Calibration Database
Save Current Settings to Configuration Database
Definition:
Saves current settings to the configuration database index.
Serial Cmd:
<K227+, database index>
Options:
1 to 7
Load Current Settings from Configuration Database
Loads a specific database index.
Serial Cmd:
<K227-, database index>
Options:
1 to 7
7–Calibration Data-
Definition:
Request Database Settings
Definition:
Associates a specific tracking setting with a database index.
Serial Cmd:
<K227?,database index>
Options:
1 to 7
Returns settings for selected Configuration Database Index. Sending <K227?,1> will
return the record for the first database index, for example:
Sending <K227?> Returns settings for the entire Configuration Database in the following format:
The configuration database allows the user to save multiple scanner configuration settings. The database can be used simply to save most commonly used scanner configurations to allow scanner to be easily adaptable to changing applications, or used in
conjunction with the Optoelectric Control, to dynamically change configurations.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
7-5
Calibration Database by Embedded Menu
Calibration Database by Embedded Menu
7–Calibration Data-
To access the Configuration Database menu from within the Autocalibration
Setup menu (page 6-8), type the number 3.
You can save your calibration settings in up to 7 database indexes.
1. Type D to save your present settings to the configuration database.
Note: From within the Autocalibration Setup menu, type the letter C.
The current Gain, Tracking, and Focus settings will be saved in Index 1.
Caution: Subsequent saves will overwrite your original settings unless you
change the # Active Settings to a number at least one greater than the number of index settings currently filled.
2. Change the # Active Settings to the number of index settings you expect to fill.
3. Press CR to return to the Autocalibration Setup menu and calculate the next
label position (if applicable).
4. Type D to save to the next index of autocalibration settings.
The database index will automatically increment by 1 and place your settings in
the next available index.
Note: See “Focus Position” on page 10-5 for additional ways for saving and
recalling database indexes.
5. Press the enter key (CR) to return to the main calibration menu or Esc to leave
the Autocalibration Setup menu entirely.
7-6
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter
Optoelectrics
8
Chapter Contents
This section tells how to apply optical settings such as Focus, Gain, and Tracking
that you learned how to acquire in Chapter 6, “Autocalibration” and how to store in
Chapter 7, “Calibration Database.”
Note: The characters NULL <> and , can only be entered through embedded menus,
not through ESP or serial commands.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
8-1
8–Optoelectrics
Overview of Optoelectrics............................................................................8-4
Optoelectric Database Modes .....................................................................8-5
Optoelectric by ESP
8–Optoelectrics
Click on this button to
bring up the Optoelectric Control menu.
To change a setting,
double-click on the
setting and use your
curser to scroll
through the options.
Optoelectrics by Serial Command
Command Title
old
comds
Optoelectric Control
Scanner Setup Status
Request
8-2
KU?
new
cmds
Format
K226,
<K226,mode,# active database settings,latch on
trigger,timer value, control trigger 1,control trigger 2,control trigger 3>
K699?
<K699?>
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 8 Optoelectrics
Optoelectrics by Embedded Menu
For information on accessing the embedded menus, see “Embedded Menus” on page 23.
To access the Configuration Database menu from within the Autocalibration
Setup menu (page 6-8), type the number 3.
8–Optoelectrics
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
8-3
Overview of Optoelectrics
Overview of Optoelectrics
Definition:
A database index of up to seven pre-defined optical indexes of settings
defining focus, gain, and tracking can be accessed and applied in the
following modes:
1. by timer in which all indexes are attempted over a predefined timeout period.
2. by an automatic search for the best database index.
3. by a combination of up to three control trigger inputs to dynamically select the optimum database index.
The index settings can also be saved and recalled selectively, or
reviewed with a Request Database Settings command.
Useful where different symbol types, sizes, qualities or distances
require more that one optical setup (focus, gain, and tracking) for
dynamic optical changes.
8–Optoelectrics
Usage:
8-4
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 8 Optoelectrics
Optoelectric Database Modes
Definition:
A database index of up to seven pre-defined optical indexes of settings defining focus, gain, and tracking can be accessed and applied
in the following modes:
1. by a timer in which all settings cycle throughout the time duration
2. by an automatic search for the best database index
3. by a combination of up to three control trigger inputs to dynamically select the optimum database index
The index settings can also be saved and recalled selectively, or
reviewed with a Request Database Settings command.
Usage:
Useful where different symbol types, sizes, qualities or distances
require more that one optical setup (focus, gain, and tracking) for
dynamic optical changes.
Serial Cmd:
<K226,mode,# active database settings,latch on trigger,timer
value, control trigger 1,control trigger 2,control trigger 3>
Default:
Disabled
Options:
0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=
8–Optoelectrics
ESP:
Disabled
Control Trigger
Automatic/static mode
Timer
Disabled Mode
Definition:
When disabled, the scanner uses the current scanner configuration
settings.
Serial Cmd:
<K226,mode,# active database settings,latch on trigger,timer value,
control trigger 1,control trigger 2,control trigger 3>
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
8-5
Optoelectric Database Modes
Timer Mode
Definition:
When this mode is selected, the scanner cycles through database settings at a time interval determined in Timer Value setting. (See “Timer
Value” on page 8-11.)
Important Note: The maximum time to move from the most inside
focus position to the most outside focus position is 400 ms. One focus
position change takes 10 ms.
Usage:
Useful in applications in which there is enough time to cycle through the
database index.
Serial Cmd:
<K226,mode,# active database settings,latch on trigger,timer value,
control trigger 1,control trigger 2,control trigger 3>
8–Optoelectrics
Calibration with Multilabel
With Multilabel enabled for more than one label, and either Timer or Automatic/
Static mode enabled, the scanner may not locate labels that are scanned at various
ranges. The reason for this is that once a label is located from the optical database
index, the scanner will continue to search for labels that meet that index of focus,
tracking and gain settings.
Automatic/Static Mode
Definition:
Selects the optimum setting from the Configuration Database.
When selected, the scanner cycles once through all the Configuration
Database settings from the closest to the furthermost focal position,
testing first for optimal signal, then for a successful decode.
Note: Since focus positions are tested in ascending order, the closer
the symbols are to the scanner, the quicker the best focus position will
be found.
Important Note: The maximum time to move from the most inside
focus position to the most outside focus position is 400 ms. One focus
position change takes 10 ms.
Usage:
Useful in a static application in which the bar code symbol is in front of
the scanner when the read cycle begins.
ESP:
Serial Cmd:
8-6
<K226,mode,# active database settings,latch on trigger,timer value,
control trigger 1,control trigger 2,control trigger 3>
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 8 Optoelectrics
Control Trigger Mode
Definition:
When Optoelectric Control mode is set to Control Trigger, input 1,
new master pin, and the trigger input pins are de-activated and reassigned as control triggers. When activated, a read cycle will be triggered and—in accordance with their respective states—select from a
database of up to seven pre-defined optical settings of Focus, Gain,
and Tracking. (See Chapter 7, “Calibration Database.”)
Usage:
Useful where different symbol types, sizes, and/or distances benefit
from pre-defined optical setups (focus, gain, and tracking) that can be
accessed ‘on the fly’ according to the combination of input states.
Serial Cmd:
<K226,mode,# active database settings,latch on trigger,timer value,
control trigger 1,control trigger 2,control trigger 3>
8–Optoelectrics
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
8-7
Optoelectric Database Modes
Process:
To use Control Trigger:
1. Setup your application’s labels by code type/size in the various
positions and/or code type/size at which they will likely appear.
2. Sketch out a diagram as in figure 8-1.
3. Setup your sensors or other controls. For example, the three object
sensors, 1, 2 & 3, are connected to
input 1, new master pin, and trigger
input respectively. The bar coded
packages on the left are numbered
here according to their database
index numbers. Package #7 will
cross all three of the sensors and
thus activate the settings for index
#7 as shown.
1
1
3
7
5
8–Optoelectrics
In this scenario only four index settings are possible. However, up to
seven combinations are possible
with other input devices such as
PLCs.
3 2
You can also enable/disable any
Figure 8-1 Control Trigger
combination controls by clicking on
Inputs
the Control Trigger Status buttons
on the bottom of the Control Trigger Map. The red buttons
indicate active states on the three control triggers. The combination of active/inactive triggers determines the focus, gain, and
tracking settings that will be applied during a read cycle. For
example, if only Control Trigger 1 is active, the focus, gain, and
tracking values that appear in the top row will be applied.
Figure 8-2 ESP Control Trigger Setup
8-8
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 8 Optoelectrics
Control Trigger #1
Definition:
When Control Trigger mode is enabled, Control Trigger #1 “hijacks”
Input 1 (see “Discrete I/0” in chapter 14) and uses it to select an optoelectric configuration from the configuration database. Active state is
set by Input 1 serial command.
Serial Cmd:
<K226,mode,# active database settings,latch on trigger,timer value,
control trigger 1,control trigger 2,control trigger 3>
Default:
Disabled
Options:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Control Trigger #2
New Master Pin is used for Control Trigger #2. When enabled and
Mode is set to Control Trigger, this input is used to select a Optoelectric configuration from Configuration Database. Active State is
“Active Closed”.
Serial Cmd:
<K226,mode,# active database settings,latch on trigger,timer value,
control trigger 1,control trigger 2,control trigger 3>
Default:
Disabled
Options:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Control Trigger #3
Definition:
Trigger is used for Control Trigger #3, and when enabled and mode
is set to Control Trigger, this input is used to select a Optoelectric
configuration from the Configuration Database. The active state is
set by the External Trigger State serial command.
Serial Cmd:
<K226,mode,# active database settings,latch on trigger,timer value,
control trigger 1,control trigger 2,control trigger 3>
Default:
Disabled
Options:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
8-9
8–Optoelectrics
Definition:
Optoelectric Database Modes
Number of Active Database Settings
Definition:
This value sets the number of configuration database settings (in Database Index) that are active. If Control Trigger mode has been
selected, this setting is ignored.
Usage:
Can be useful when certain settings that are needed in one application
are not needed in another and processing time is at a premium.
Serial Cmd:
<K226,mode,# active database settings,latch on trigger,timer
value, control trigger 1,control trigger 2,control trigger 3>
Default:
1
Options:
Any number from 1 to 7.
8–Optoelectrics
ESP
Latch on Trigger
Definition:
This feature is only used in Control Trigger mode. If enabled, the configuration database settings selected at the start of a read cycle will
remain active during the entire read cycle. If Latch on Trigger is disabled, depending on the control trigger inputs, the scanner’s optical
settings can change throughout the read cycle.
Note: When Control Trigger #3 is enabled, Latch on Trigger is also
enabled regardless of its previous setting.
Usage:
Useful when only one database index is required for the application.
Serial Cmd:
<K226,mode,# active database settings,latch on trigger,timer value,
control trigger 1,control trigger 2,control trigger 3>
Default:
Enabled
Options:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
ESP
8-10
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 8 Optoelectrics
Timer Value
Definition:
When Timer mode is enabled, Timer Value is the time interval in
which database index settings are cycled.
Usage:
Useful in slower applications where there is enough time to cycle
through the database index.
ESP:
Serial Cmd:
<K226,mode,# active database settings,latch on trigger,timer value,
control trigger 1,control trigger 2,control trigger 3>
Default:
5
Options:
0 to 255 (increments of 10ms)
8–Optoelectrics
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
8-11
8–Optoelectrics
Optoelectric Database Modes
8-12
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Raster/Laser
Control
Chapter
9
Chapter Contents
Raster Setup ............................................................................................... 9-3
Laser Setup................................................................................................. 9-6
Raster/Laser by Embedded Menu .............................................................. 9-9
This section explains the setup and adjustments for the raster and the laser setups.
Raster/Laser Setup by Serial Command
old
cmds
new
cmds
Raster
KR
K506,
Laser
KC
K700,
Command Title
Scanner Setup
Status Request
KU?
Format
<K506,status,top offset,bottom offset,raster
sweep rate,read cycle on/off>
<K700,laser on/off status,laser framing status,laser off time,laser on time,laser power>
K699? <K699?>
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
9-1
9–Raster/Laser Con-
Note: The characters NULL <> and , can only be entered through embedded menus,
not through ESP or serial commands.
Raster/Laser Setup by ESP Menus
Click on this button to
bring up the
Raster/Laser menu.
To change a setting,
double-click on the
setting and use your
curser to scroll
through the options.
Note: Setup commands in the ESP-MP are accessed from both the Read Cycle/Triggering menu and the Raster button on the toolbar.
Raster/Laser Setup by Embedded Menu
9–Raster/Laser Con-
To access the Raster/Laser menu from within the Autocalibration Setup menu
(page 6-8), type the number 2.
9-2
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 9 Raster/Laser Control
Raster Setup
Definition:
The user can enable raster scanning and adjust the sweep range (the
upper and lower limits of the raster sweep).
Usage:
Raster scanning is useful when labels vary in placement and a single
scan line cannot be counted on to cross the label.
Raster scanning is also useful in reading PDF417.
Serial Cmd:
<K506,status,top offset,bottom offset,raster sweep rate,read cycle on/off>
Raster Status
Definition:
When disabled, the raster mirror will park at the top of the raster sweep.
Serial Cmd:
<K506,status,top offset,bottom offset,raster sweep rate,read cycle on/off>
Default:
Disabled
Options:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Note: Raster sweeps are only counted during a read cycle (continuous, triggered, and
read rate). Raster sweeps are NOT counted when the raster motor is parked, disabled,
set to straight line operation (top and bottom are equal), or when performing a selfcalibration.
Top Offset
Decreasing the
Top Offset value
causes the top of
the raster pattern
to move up.
Serial Cmd:
<K506,status,top offset,bottom offset,raster sweep rate,read cycle on/off>
Default:
127
Options:
0 to 255
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
9–Raster/Laser Con-
Definition:
9-3
Raster Setup
Bottom Offset
Definition:
Increasing the Bottom Offset value
causes the bottom of
the raster pattern to
move down.
Serial Cmd:
<K506,status,top offset,bottom offset,raster sweep rate,read cycle on/off>
Default:
127
Options:
0 to 255
9–Raster/Laser Con-
Note: For single scan line operation, set Top Offset equal to Bottom Offset or click
on the Static Line option.
Note: Assigning a larger value to Top Offset than Bottom Offset will park the raster
mirror in its “home” (default) position.
9-4
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 9 Raster/Laser Control
Raster Sweep Rate
Definition:
The raster sweep rate is the number of sweeps per second the raster mirror
completes. A sweep is one pass of the raster, up or down. The maximum
sweep rate is limited by the size of the arc the raster must move through.
Usage:
If your application allows it, a slower sweep rate can produce more scans
per second and better read rates. To determine the minimum read rate for
your application, see “Raster Picket Fence Calculation” on page A-32.
Serial Cmd:
<K506,status,top offset,bottom offset,raster sweep rate,read cycle on/off>
Default:
10
Options:
0 to 30
Table 9-1 Maximum Sweep Rates at Selected Sweep Arcs
Raster Sweep Arc
0 to 10°
11 to 20°
21 to 30°
Maximum Sweeps
per Second
30
20
10
9–Raster/Laser Con-
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
9-5
Laser Setup
Laser Setup
The laser can be turned off between read cycles and the duration of the scan and
hence the width of the scan can also be adjusted.
Laser On/Off Status
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
When enabled, the laser is ON only during the read cycle. When disabled, the laser operates continuously.
Laser On/Off extends the life of the laser. It is useful where there
are significant time gaps between symbols. It also provides visual
confirmation of a read cycle duration and minimizes laser exposure to
people.
<K700,laser on/off status,laser framing status,laser off time,laser on
time,laser power>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Note: A serial or external trigger must be enabled for Laser On/Off to take effect.
9–Raster/Laser Con-
Note: Laser On/Off is not recommended when New Trigger is enabled, since the
laser will effectively remain on continuously.
9-6
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 9 Raster/Laser Control
Laser Framing Status
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Sets the length of time the laser is ON during each scan so that only a
selected portion of the scan width is effectively scanned.
This is useful to avoid highly reflective objects, for filtering out unwanted
signals and avoiding the wrong symbols.
<K700,laser on/off status,laser framing status,laser off time,laser on
time,laser power>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
To adjust laser framing, click the Raster button, click the Laser Setup tab, and click
the Laser On and Laser Off arrows up or down as shown in figure 9-1.
Scan beam direction
Laser Off
Time
Figure 9-2 Laser
Framing Pattern
When Laser Framing is not enabled, the scan beam sweeps across the full scan width.
When enabled, the laser remains OFF during the Laser Off time (see figure 9-2) beginning at the start of the scan beam sweep and turns ON for the duration of the Laser On
Time.
Because scan widths are not always perfectly symmetrical, the most effective way to
setup laser framing is to experiment with the Laser On and Laser Off commands until
you get the best results.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
9-7
9–Raster/Laser Con-
Figure 9-1 ESP Laser
Framing Control
Laser On
Time
Laser Setup
Laser Off Time
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Duration of laser off time, in increments of 1/255th of the total scan
width.
Important: The combined values of Laser Off Time and Laser On
Time cannot exceed 255 which is the duration of one scan.
<K700,laser on/off status,laser framing status,laser off time,laser on
time,laser power>
0
0 to 255
When setting up Laser Framing in ESP-MP, use the Off Time and On Time arrows to
constrain or expand the laser framing area.
Laser On Time
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Duration of laser on time, in increments of 1/255th of the total scan
width.
Important: The combined values of Laser Off Time and Laser On
Time cannot exceed 255 which is the duration of one scan.
<K700,laser on/off status,laser framing status,laser off time,laser on
time,laser power>
255
0 to 255
9–Raster/Laser Con-
Laser Power
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
9-8
The user can select the Low or High laser power.
Applications that read past 45 inches typically use High.
<K700,laser on/off status,laser framing status,laser off time,laser on
time,laser power>
Low
0 = Low (laser power = 2 mW)
1 = High (laser power = 3.25 mW)
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 9 Raster/Laser Control
Raster/Laser by Embedded Menu
To access the Raster/Laser Framing menu, send <@> to open the Autocalibration Setup menu (figure 6-5 on page 6-8) and type the number 2.
Figure 9-3 Embedded Calibration Results Menu
Raster Settings
Sweep Rate, Raster Status, and Raster On/Off are explained more fully in “Raster
Setup” on page 9-3.
Laser Settings
Laser settings are also dynamically updated at the bottom of the menu.
Full instructions and menus for laser operations can be found in “Laser Setup” on page
9-6.
Press the enter key (CR) to return to the main calibration menu or Esc to leave the
Auto Calibration Setup menu entirely.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
9-9
9–Raster/Laser Con-
Type the letter T to increment the Top Offset and an R to decrement. Notice that the
Top Offset reading at the bottom of the menu changes accordingly.
Type the letter B to increment the Bottom Offset and V to decrement.
9–Raster/Laser Con-
Raster/Laser by Embedded Menu
9-10
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Scanner Setup
10
Chapter Contents
Scan Speed ...............................................................................................10-4
Focus.........................................................................................................10-5
Gain ...........................................................................................................10-6
Transition Sample Counter........................................................................10-7
Maximum Element.....................................................................................10-8
This section includes AGC and factory settings such as Focus, Gain, Tracking, and
Scan Speed.
Note: The characters NULL <> and , can only be entered through embedded menus,
not through ESP or serial commands.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
10-1
10–Scanner Setup
Chapter
10–Scanner Setup
Scanner Setup by ESP
Click on this button to
bring up the Scanner
Setup menu.
To change a setting,
double-click on the
setting and use your
curser to scroll
through the options.
Scanner Setup by Serial Command
old
comds
new
cmds
Scan Speed
Gain/Tracking
KE
KD
K500,
K504,
Transition Counter
KH
K505,
Focus
Scanner Setup Status
Request
K.
K508,
<K500,scan speed>
<K504,gain,tracking>
<K505,transition counter status,transition counter
threshold>
<K508, focus position,zero position>
KU?
K699?
<K699?>
Command Title
Format
Note: To save Factory Settings changes to NOVRAM, send <Zp>, or if in ESP, select
Save to Scanner/Advanced/Send and Save, Including Factory. (See “Save
Active Settings including Factory for Power-on” on page -26.)
10-2
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 10 Scanner Setup
For information on accessing the embedded menus, see “Embedded Menus” on page 23.
From the Main menu, scroll down through the options and select the following screen:
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
10-3
10–Scanner Setup
Scanner Setup by Embedded Menu
10–Scanner Setup
Scan Speed
Scan Speed
(factory setting)
Definition:
Allows the user to set the number of scans per second by controlling
the spinning mirror motor speed.
Usage:
Typically, to ensure a minimum number of scans, faster scan speeds are
used for fast moving labels and/or longer labels with larger bar widths.
Note: Scan beams will be moving faster across labels further out in the
scan range since the moving beam is being projected from a spinning
mirror.
Serial Cmd:
<KE500,scan speed>
Default:
400
Options:
400 to 1000
10-4
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 10 Scanner Setup
Focus Position
Definition:
Focus is the act of narrowing the focal spot to its smallest size and
sharpest edges at the desired distance from the scanner by moving an
internal lens in discrete movement with a stepper motor.
Focus Position is the length of the internal lens.
Usage:
Focus is generally done by the Autocalibration routine (see Chapter 6,
“Autocalibration”). However, in certain applications involving specific
focal lengths, manual control of focus might be appropriate.
Serial Cmd:
<K508,focus position,zero position>
Default:
10 (inside focal length)
Options:
0 to 40 (nearest to furthermost focal length)
Zero Position
(factory setting)
Definition:
This field displays the current factory-set zero focus position.
Usage:
This field is READ ONLY, and is set by a qualified technician during factory setup.
Serial Cmd:
<K508,focus position,zero position>
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
10-5
10–Scanner Setup
Focus
10–Scanner Setup
Gain Adjustment
Gain Adjustment
Definition:
Sets a voltage amplitude value for the analog circuitry.
Usage:
Can be useful for fine-tuning gain or when portions of analog signals
spike as in the case of specular reflection or extraneous noise.
Caution: Changes to Gain are typically done by qualified technicians in
Autocalibration. See Chapter 6, “Autocalibration.”
Serial Cmd:
<K504,gain,tracking>
Default:
Default is 40 (nominal). Gain is optimized at the factory before shipment; the default value may not be 40.
Options:
0 to 255
Tracking
Definition:
Tracks peak signals and selects an amplitude reference point to sample
the analog signals for converting to digital.
Usage:
Useful in fine-tuning tracking or when conditions of poor contrast or
blurred bar edges exist.
Caution: Changes to Tracking are typically done in Autocalibration.
See Chapter 6, “Autocalibration.”
Serial Cmd:
<K504,gain,tracking>
Default:
Tracking is optimized at the factory before shipment; the default value
may not be 40.
Options:
0 to 127
10-6
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 10 Scanner Setup
Definition:
During the read cycle, the scanner counts the number of bar and space
transitions defined in the Transition Counter Threshold. If the count
matches or exceeds the threshold, the scanner will perform AGC routines.
Transition Counter Status
Serial Cmd:
<K505,transition counter status,transition counter threshold>
Default:
Enabled
Options:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Transition Counter Threshold
Definition:
Determines the number of bar/space transitions that must be read
before a label is considered present and AGC can be resolved.
Usage:
Can be useful in certain application where extraneous objects in the
field of view might require a higher threshold.
Serial Cmd:
<K505,transition counter status,transition counter threshold>
Default:
14
Options:
0 to 255
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
10-7
10–Scanner Setup
Transition Counter
10–Scanner Setup
Maximum Element
Maximum Element
Definition:
Maximum Element represents the maximum bar element width that’s
allowed before a video reset occurs (default to white).
Usage:
Useful if having difficulty reading large element symbols like PDF417.
Caution: Do not change this parameter unless instructed by a Microscan representative.
Serial Cmd:
<K502,maximum element>
Default:
1000 (30.5 µs)
Options:
1 to 65535
10-8
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter
Matchcode
11
11–Matchcode
Chapter Contents
Overview of Matchcode .............................................................................11-4
Matchcode Type ........................................................................................11-5
Master Label Database ...........................................................................11-11
New Master Pin .......................................................................................11-16
This section explains the matchcode output functions and the master label database
setup.
Note: The characters NULL <> and , can only be entered through embedded menus,
not through ESP or serial commands.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
11-1
Matchcode by ESP
11–Matchcode
Click this button to bring up the
Matchcode menu.
To change a setting, double-click
the setting and use your curser to
scroll through the options.
Matchcode by Serial Command
Command Title
old
cmds
Matchcode Type
Kn
Master Label Database Size
New Master Pin
Sequential Step
Enter/Delete Master Label
Data
KM
Kz
Request Master Label Data
M
Operations Status Request
KV?
11-2
M
new
cmds
Format
<K223,type,sequential matching,match start
K223, position,match length,wild card character,
sequence on noread,sequence on mismatch>
K224, <K224,number of master labels>
K225, <K225,status>
K228, <K228,sequence step>
<K231,master label number,master label data
K231,
[no data will delete]>
<K231,?>[for all] or
K231,
<K231,master label number?>
K399? <K399?>
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 11 Matchcode
Matchcode by Embedded Menu
For information on accessing the embedded menus, see “Embedded Menus” on page
A-23.
From the Main menu, scroll down through the options and select the following screen:
11–Matchcode
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
11-3
Overview of Matchcode
11–Matchcode
Overview of Matchcode
Definition:
With Matchcode you can store master label data in the scanner’s
memory, compare this data against the scanned bar codes, and define
how label data and/or discrete signal output will be directed.
A master label database can be setup for up to 10 master labels. See
“Master Label Database” on page 11-11.
Note: Matchcode will function with multiple labels (see “Multilabel” on
page 4-16); however if Matchcode Type is set to Sequential or if
Triggering Mode is set to Continuous Read 1 Output, Number of
Labels will default back to 1 (if set to any number greater than 1).
Usage:
Matchcode is used in applications to sort, route, or verify data based
on matching the specific bar code label in a variety of ways as defined
in this section. For example, a manufacturer might sort a product based
on dates that are embedded in the bar code.
Steps for entering and using master labels
1. Set Triggering Mode to External or Serial (“Trigger Mode” on page 4-4).
2. Chose the method of label comparison that fits your application (“Matchcode
Type” on page 11-5).
3. Define the output you want to achieve with your matchcode setup:
a. Barcode output (“Bar Code Output” on page 12-5).
b. Discrete output (“Output 1” on page 14-5, “Output 2” on page 14-10, and “Output 3” on page 14-10).
3. Select the number of master labels you want to create (“Master Label Database
Size” on page 11-11).
4. Decide which of 4 ways you want enter your master label(s):
a. Use ESP to type in master label data directly (“Enter Master Label Data” on page
11-12).
b. Send a serial command with label data in the form of <Mmaster label#,data>.
c. Send a <G> (Scan Next Label as Master Label) command.
d. Enable the New Master Pin command (“New Master Pin” on page 11-16) and
activate a discrete input to store the in the next label scanned as master label.
5. Enter master label data using the method determined in step 4.
11-4
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 11 Matchcode
Matchcode Type
Definition:
Allows the user to choose the way that master labels will be compared
with subsequently scanned labels.
Note: First set Triggering Mode to External or Serial.
ESP:
11–Matchcode
Serial Cmd:
<K223,matchcode type,sequential matching,match start position,
match length,wild card character,sequence on noread,sequence on
mismatch>
Default:
Disabled
Options:
0
1
2
3
Disabled:
Has no effect on operations.
Enabled:
Instructs the scanner to compare labels or portions of labels with the
master label.
Wild Card:
Allows the user to enter user defined wild card characters in the master
label.
Sequential
Matching:
Instructs the scanner to sequence after each match (numeric only) and
compare labels or portions of labels for sequential numbers.
Note: If Matchcode Type is set to Sequential, Number of Labels
will default back to 1 (if set to any number greater than 1).
=
=
=
=
Disabled
Enabled
Sequential
Wild Card
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
11-5
Matchcode Type
11–Matchcode
Sequential Matching
Definition:
With Sequential enabled, Sequential Matching determines if a count
is in ascending (incremental) or descending (decremental) order.
Usage:
Useful in tracking product serial numbers that increment or decrement
sequentially.
Serial Cmd:
<K223,matchcode type,sequential matching,match start position,
match length,wild card character,sequence on noread,sequence on
mismatch>
Default:
Increment
Options:
0 = Increment
1 = Decrement
Match Start Position
Definition:
Match Start Position determines the portions of labels that will be
matched by defining the first character in the label (from left to right)
that will be compared with those of the master label, when Matchcode
Type is set to Enabled or Sequential.
Function:
For example, if Match Start Position is set to 3, the first 2 characters
read in the symbol will be ignored and only the 3rd and subsequent
characters to the right will be compared, up to the number of characters specified by Match Length.
Usage:
Match Start Position is useful in defining specific portions of a symbol
for comparisons. For example, if a symbol contains a part number, manufacturing date, and lot code info but the user is only interested in the part
number information. With Match Start Position the scanner can be set
to only sort on the part number and ignore the rest of the characters.
Serial Cmd:
<K223,matchcode type,sequential matching,match start position,
match length,wild card character,sequence on noread,sequence on
mismatch>
Default:
0
Options:
0 to 2710
Note: Match Start Position must be set to 1 or greater to enable this feature. A 0
setting will disable this feature.
11-6
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 11 Matchcode
Match Length
Defines the length of the character string that will be compared with
that of the master label when Match Start Position is set to 1 or
greater. when Match Start Position is set to 0, no comparison will
occur.
Usage:
For example, if Match Length is set to 6 in a 10 character symbol, and
Match Start Position is set for 2, only the 2nd through 7th characters
(from left to right) will be compared.
Serial Cmd:
<K223,matchcode type,sequential matching,match start position,
match length,wild card character,sequence on noread,sequence on
mismatch>
Default:
1
Options:
1 to 27102710
Wild Card Character
Definition:
Wild Card Character allows a user to define a wild card character as
part of the master label.
Usage:
For example, with Wild Card Character defined as the default asterisk, defining CR*34 as the master label will result in matches for
CR134, CR234, but not CR2345. Entering the wild card at the end of
the master label as in CR* will result in matches for variable label
lengths such as CR1, CR23, CR358, etc.
Serial Cmd:
<K223,matchcode type,sequential matching,match start position,
match length,wild card character,sequence on noread,sequence on
mismatch>
Default:
* (asterisk)
Options:
Any valid ASCII character
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
11-7
11–Matchcode
Definition:
Matchcode Type
11–Matchcode
Sequence On Noread
Definition:
When Sequence On Noread is Enabled and Matchcode is set to
Sequential, the scanner sequences the master label on every match or
noread. When disabled, it does not sequence on a noread.
Usage:
Sequence On Noread is useful when the scanner needs to stay in
sequence even if no decode occurs.
Serial Cmd:
<K223,matchcode type,sequential matching,match start position,
match length,wild card character,sequence on noread,sequence on
mismatch>
Default:
Enabled
Options:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
As an example of Sequence on Noread Enabled, consider the following series of
decodes:
Master label
Decoded label
Master label after decode
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
001
002
noread
004
noread
noread
007
002
003
004 (sequenced on noread)
005
006 (sequenced on noread)
007 (sequenced on noread)
008
As an example of Sequence on Noread Disabled, consider the following series of
decodes:
Master label
Decoded label
Master label after decode
001
002
003
003
004
004
004
001
002
noread
003
noread
noread
004
002
003
003 (not sequenced)
004
004 (not sequenced)
004 (not sequenced)
005
11-8
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 11 Matchcode
Sequence On Mismatch
Note: Matchcode must be set to Sequential for this command to function.
When set to Enabled, the master label sequences on every decode,
match or mismatch.
When set to Disabled, the master label will not sequence whenever
consecutive mismatches occur.
Usage:
Enable this parameter if every trigger event should have a decode and
more than one consecutive mismatch may occur.
Disable this parameter if every trigger event should have a decode but
no more than one consecutive mismatch may occur.
Serial Cmd:
<K223,matchcode type,sequential matching,match start position,
match length,wild card character,sequence on noread,sequence on
mismatch>
Default:
Disabled
Options:
0 = Disabled,
1 = Enabled
The scanner will sequence the master to one more/less than the decoded symbol. As
an example of Sequence On Mismatch Enabled, consider the following decodes:
Master label
Decoded label
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
001
002
abc
004
def
ghi
007
Master label after decode
002
003
004 (sequenced on mismatch)
005
006 (sequenced on mismatch)
007 (sequenced on mismatch)
008
As an example of Sequence On Mismatch Disabled, consider the following
decodes:
Master label
Decoded label
001
002
003
004
005
006
006
001
002
abc
004
def
ghi
006
Master label after decode
002
003
004 (sequenced because of previous match)
005
006 (sequenced because of previous match)
006 (not sequenced because of previous mismatch)
007
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
11-9
11–Matchcode
Definition:
Matchcode Type
11–Matchcode
Sequence Step
Definition:
Sequencing in Matchcode operations can occur in steps from 1 to
32,768.
Sequencing performs like a mechanical counter by displaying positive
integers and a specific number of digits after roll-overs. For example,
000 – 3 = 997 (not –3) and 999 + 3 = 002 (not 1002).
Usage:
Useful in applications in which it is desirable to count by intervals other
than 1.
Serial Cmd:
<K228,sequence step>
Default:
1
Options:
1 to 32,768
Note: See <K223> commands (“Matchcode Type” on page 11-5) for more information.
As an example of Sequence Step, if Sequence Step is set to 3 and Sequential
Matching is set to Increment.
Master
label
003
003
003
006
006
006
11-10
Decoded
label
001
002
003
004
005
006
Master label
after decode
003
003
006
006
006
009
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 11 Matchcode
Master Label Database
Important: Master Label Database is used only for comparing entire bar codes,
when Sequential and Wild Card are NOT enabled, and Start Position is equal to 0.
Master Label Database Overview
Allows you to define up to 10 master labels as the master label database, which can be entered by keyboard, scanned-in, displayed, or
deleted by serial or ESP commands.
Usage:
Useful where more than one master label is required, as in a Multilabel
setup, for matching and other matchcode operations.
Master Label Database Size
Definition:
Master Label Data Base Size allows you to select 1 to 10 master
labels for the master label database.
ESP:
Click the Matchcode button
to access the master label:
First set the number of master labels you want to include by doubleclicking Database Size and entering the number.
Double-click here and set the master
label database size.
Serial Cmd:
< master label data base size>
Note: You must follow this command with a save command <A> or
<Z>.
Default:
1
Options:
1 to 10
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
11-11
11–Matchcode
Definition:
Master Label Database
Enter Master Label Data
Allows you to enter master label data for a specific master label index
number (1 to 10), provided the index number is not larger than the
number of labels enabled by the Master Label Database Size (see
page 11-11). For example, if Master Label Database Size is set to 2,
you will not be able to enter data for labels 3 through 10.
ESP:
Click the Output Format button on the tool bar and click the Master
Database tab.
11–Matchcode
Definition:
Double-click
here to open the
label data window.
Enter data here for label # 2.
Serial Cmd:
<K231,master label number,master label data>
Default:
1, blank
Options:
1 to 10, data (any combination of ASCII text up to the maximum indicated
in “Maximum Characters for Master Label Database” on page 11-13).
For example, to enter data for master label 9, after making certain that
master label database size is enabled for 9 or more labels (see “Master
Label Database Size” on page 11-11), send <KK231,9,data>.
11-12
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 11 Matchcode
Caution: Since the total number of characters available for the master label data
base is2710 changes to the Master Label Data Base Size will re-allocate the number of characters available for each master label and could cause existing master
labels to be deleted (except master label #1 unless it also exceeds the size limitation).
The table below specifies the maximum number of characters available to each label
according to the number of master labels defined, from 1 through 10. See “Master
Label Database Size” on page 11-11.
Table 11-1 Maximum Characters for Master Label Database
Maximum
Characters
2710
1355
903
677
542
Master Label
Number
#6
#7
#8
#9
#10
11–Matchcode
Master Label
Number
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
Maximum
Characters
451
387
338
301
271
Request Master Label Data
Serial Cmd:
<K231,master label number?>
This will display data in the master label number you indicated. For
example, to request master label #5, enter <K231,?>. The scanner
transmits master label #5 data in brackets in the following format:
<K231,5/.....>. If no master label data available, the output will be:
<K231,5,>.
ESP:
Double-clicking the Master Database tab, as shown under “Enter Master Label Data” on page 11-12, will display current master label data for
all master labels.
Request All Master Label Data
Serial Cmd:
<K231,?>
This command will return master label data for all labels enabled (up to 10).
ESP:
Double-clicking the Master Database tab, as shown under “Enter Master Label Data” on page 11-12, will display current master label data for
all master labels.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
11-13
Master Label Database
11–Matchcode
Delete Master Label Data
Definition:
You can directly delete the master label data by serial command or ESP.
ESP:
You can also delete master label data for any master label by erasing
the data in the Master Database popup window (under Output Format) and clicking OK, as shown here.
Serial Cmd:
<K231,master label number,>
To delete a master label, enter the database number and a comma,
but leave the data field empty. For example, to delete master label
#5, send the following <K231,5,>. The command is entered with a
blank master label data field which tells the scanner to delete the
selected master label from the database.
Default:
(no data)
Options:
Any combination of ASCII text up to the maximum indicated in
“Maximum Characters for Master Label Database” on page 11-13.
11-14
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 11 Matchcode
Store Next Label Scanned as Master Label1
Definition:
After you’ve set the size in the database (“Master Label Database Size”
on page 11-11), you can order the scanner to scan-in the next label as
the master label for any given master label number.
ESP:
In the Master Database tab, under the Output Format menu
1. Select the master label index number in which you want to store
the label data.
11–Matchcode
2. Click on the Scan Label into Selected Index.
Serial Cmd:
<G master label number>
To store the next label scanned as master label #1, send: <G> or
<G1>.
To store next label scanned as the master label for any other master
label database number, send: <G master label number [1-10]>.
For example, <G5> will cause the next label scanned to be entered as
master label #5.
Default:
(no data)
1. While not strictly a configuration command, <G> is included here because it is so closely
related to other master label commands.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
11-15
New Master Pin
11–Matchcode
New Master Pin
Definition:
After New Master Pin is enabled, a pulse can be received on the new
master pin which will cause the scanner to record the next decoded bar
code label(s) as the new master label(s).
It is important to note that the enabling New Master Pin does not in
itself cause a master label to be recorded. The master pin must then be
activated momentarily (for a minimum of 10 ms) before a master label
can be scanned into memory. (See Table A-7, “Host 25-pin Connector,”
on page A-8and Figure 16-7, Wiring Box PCB, on page 16- 8.)
Usage:
Some applications require the line worker to change the master label.
This can be done by installing a switch at the location of the scanner. It
is very common to have a keyed switch so that accidental switching
does not occur.
ESP:
In the Matchcode menu, select New Master Pin, double-click on Disabled and select Enabled.
Serial Cmd:
<K225,status>
Default:
Disabled
Options:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
After New Master Pin has been enabled and the pin activated, decodes will be saved
in the master database beginning with master label #1. If the scanner is configured for
a multilabel read cycle (Number of Labels is greater than 1), the remaining decodes
will be saved in each consecutive master label location. For example, if Number of
Labels is set to 3 and New Master Pin is then activated, at the end of the next read
cycle, the decoded bar code labels will be saved as master labels 1, 2, and 3.
11-16
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter
Outputs
12
Chapter Contents
This section explains the commands for controlling data and beeper outputs.
Note: The characters NULL <> and , can only be entered through embedded menus,
not through ESP or serial commands.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
12-1
12–Outputs
Output Data by Embedded Menu ..............................................................12-4
Bar Code Output........................................................................................12-6
Noread Message .......................................................................................12-9
Beeper Status..........................................................................................12-10
Quality Output..........................................................................................12-11
Serial Verification.....................................................................................12-12
Outputs by Serial Command
old
cmds
new
cmds
Serial Verification
KS
K701,
Beeper
Quality Output
Bar Code Output
Output During Diagnostic
Warning Messages
Noread Message
Ku
KJ
Kl
K702,
K704,
K705,
Command Title
K713,
Kk
K714,
Format
<K701,serial command echo status,serial command
beep status,control/hex output>
<K702,status>
<K704,quality output separator,reads/trigger status>
<K705,status,when to output>
<K713,channel,status1,status2,status3,status4,
status5,status6,status7,status8,status9>
<K714,status,message>
Outputs by Embedded Menu
12–Outputs
For information on accessing the embedded menus, see “Embedded Menus” on page
A-23.
From the Main menu, scroll down through the options and select the following screen:
12-2
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 12 Outputs
Output Data by ESP Menu
Click this button to
bring up the Outputs
menu.
Note: For Raster Setup and Laser Setup, see Chapter 9, “Raster/Laser Control.”
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
12-3
12–Outputs
To change a setting,
double-click the setting and use your
curser to scroll through
the options.
Noread Message
Noread Message
Definition:
Usage:
When enabled, and if no bar code label has been decoded before timeout or the end of the read cycle, the noread message will be transmitted to the host.
Used in applications where the host needs serial verification that a label
has not been read and especially useful in new print verification.
Noread Status
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
<K714,status,message>
Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Noread Message
12–Outputs
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Any combination of ASCII characters can be defined as the noread
message.
<K714,status,message>
NOREAD
0 to 128 ASCII characters.
Note: Noread Message will only be transmitted if Bar Code Output (page 12-5) is
set to Match, Mismatch or Good Read.
Noread Message can be set to any ASCII characters except NULL <> and ,
(comma).
12-4
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 12 Outputs
Bar Code Output
Note: Bar Code Output relates to data and should not to be confused with
Outputs 1, 2, and 3 listed in the Outputs Parameters which describe output states
and functions.
Bar Code Output Status
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Defines the conditions under which decoded bar code labels are transmitted to the host.
Useful when the host needs bar code data only under certain conditions.
<K705,output status,when to output>
Good Read
0 = Disabled
1 = Match
2 = Mismatch
3 = Good Read
Disabled
Definition:
Usage:
When set to Disabled, the scanner will not transmit any data that is
generated during a read cycle (bar codes, noreads, etc.).
It is useful when an application only needs to use the discrete outputs
and can allow the scanner to do the decision-making. When Disabled,
the host does not need the bar code data and the communication lines
are used only for setup and status checks.
Match
Definition:
Usage:
When set to Match, the scanner transmits bar code data whenever a
bar code matches a master label. However, if Matchcode Type is Disabled, it transmits on any good read.
Note: A noread can still be transmitted if Enabled.
Match is used in an application that requires specific bar code information and needs to sort, route or verify based on matching the specific
bar code data.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
12-5
12–Outputs
Note: Bar Code Output Status if set to Match or Mismatch will not take effect
unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master label is loaded into memory.
Bar Code Output
Mismatch
Definition:
Usage:
With Mismatch enabled, the scanner transmits bar code data whenever the bar code data information does NOT match the master label.
Note: A noread can still be transmitted if enabled.
Mismatch is typically used as a flag within the host system to prevent
an item from being routed in the wrong container.
Good Read
Definition:
Usage:
With Good Read enabled, the scanner transmits bar code data on any
good read regardless of Matchcode Type setting.
Note: A noread can still be transmitted if enabled.
Good Read is used when an application requires all bar code data to
be transmitted. It’s typically used in tracking applications in which
each object is uniquely identified.
12–Outputs
When to Output Bar Code Data
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
This command allows the user to choose when bar code data can be
sent to the host.
<K705,output status,when to output>
As Soon As Possible
0 = As Soon As Possible
1 = End of Read Cycle
As Soon As Possible
Definition:
Usage:
12-6
Enabling As Soon As Possible causes bar code data to be sent to the
host immediately after a bar code has been successfully decoded.
Note: More than one decode might in fact be required to qualify as a
good decode, depending on how Decodes Before Output is set.
As Soon As Possible is useful in applications in which bar code data
needs to be moved quickly to the host, typically when the host is making decisions based on bar code data.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 12 Outputs
End of Read Cycle
Definition:
Enabling End of Read Cycle means that bar code data does not get
sent to the host until the read cycle ends with a timeout or new trigger.
End of read cycle
Start of read cycle
Read cycle Duration
Host
activates trigger
This is when host
expects output
Figure 12-1 Read Cycle
Usage:
End of Read Cycle is useful in timing-based systems in which the host
is not ready to accept data at the time it is decoded.
Note: Whenever Quality Output is Enabled, outputs will always function in End Of Read Cycle mode.
12–Outputs
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
12-7
Serial Verification
Serial Verification
Allows the user to verify configuration command status.
Serial Command Echo Status
Definition:
Function:
12–Outputs
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
When enabled, a configuration command received from the host is echoed back to the host with the resultant settings.
If a command with multiple fields is processed, some of the fields may
have been processed properly while others were not. The changes will
appear in the string echoed back so that the user will know which fields
did or did not change.
This command is useful in removing any doubt about the scanner’s
interpretation of any configuration command.
For example, if the current preamble is “SOM” and <Kd1, START> is
entered, the scanner will echo back <Kd1, SOM> since the attempted
entry “START” exceeds the four character limit for that command.
Therefore it is rejected and the existing “SOM” message is echoed back
and remains the preamble message.
<K701,serial command echo status,serial command beep status,control/hex output>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Serial Command Beep Status
Definition:
Function:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
12-8
Causes the scanner to beep once whenever a K command is entered to
indicate that the command was accepted and processed.
If an invalid command is entered, the scanner beeps 5 times to indicate
an invalid entry. However, this does not necessarily mean that all data
fields have been entered incorrectly. Only one bad field needs to be
found in order to activate the 5 beep response.
Used to audibly verify the acceptance and validity of a command.
<K701,serial command echo status,serial command beep status,control/hex output>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 12 Outputs
Control/Hex Output
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Determines the response to an Serial Command Echo or status
request command.
When set to Control, two characters are transmitted to represent a
non-displayable character. For example, a carriage return will be shown
as the two characters: ^M.
When set to Hex, the output is the hex character.
Useful for viewing settings with binary characters when using serial
command on a terminal.
<K701,serial command echo status,serial command beep status,control/hex output>
Control
0 = Control
1 = Hex
12–Outputs
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
12-9
Beeper Status
Beeper Status
Definition:
A beep is emitted either after each good read of a bar code label or
after each noread.
Note: Beeper will also sound if any of the following occur:
• the scanner is defaulted
• a send/save command from ESP or an Exit command from any
embedded menu
Usage:
• a <Z>, <Zp>, <Zd>, or <K701,,1> command is sent
Can be used as an audible verification that either a good read or a
noread has occurred.
Status
12–Outputs
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
<K702,status,volume>
On Good
0 = Disabled
1 = On Good
2 = On Noread
Volume
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
12-10
<K702,status,volume>
Level 4
0 = Off
1 = Level 1
2 = Level 2
3 = Level 3
4 = Level 4
5 = Level 5
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 12 Outputs
Quality Output
Definition:
Usage:
Allows the host to track the number of good reads per trigger by
appending a five digit numeric field to the end of bar code label data.
When enabled, bar code data is followed by a separator, followed by the
five digits in the form of 00000. For example, a certain bar code that
has been averaging 00100 reads per read cycle suddenly drops to
00012, this would be a good indication that a problem has arisen even
though good reads are still occurring.
Host system can monitor scanning performance (printing process,
scanning environment changes, etc.) by setting thresholds in their processing or displaying the outputs for visual verification.
See “Reads per Trigger Threshold” on page 14-9.
Separator
<K704,quality output separator,reads/trigger status>
, (comma)
any ASCII character
12–Outputs
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Note: For all serial configuration commands, the following characters cannot be
used: , < > NUL
Reads/Trigger Status
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
<K704,quality output separator,reads/trigger status>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
12-11
12–Outputs
Quality Output
12-12
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter
13
Output Format
and Filtering
Overview of Output Format/Filtering..........................................................13-4
Extraction Mode ........................................................................................13-5
Insertion Mode...........................................................................................13-7
Advanced Output Format by ESP .............................................................13-9
Multilabel Output Format Assignment .....................................................13-10
Ordered Output/Filtering..........................................................................13-11
Master Database in ESP .........................................................................13-16
This section has instructions for assigning formatting rules that determine what portions of a bar code label will be read and specific sequence and data that will be
inserted in the output.
Note: The characters NULL <> and , can only be entered through embedded menus,
not through ESP or serial commands.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
13-1
13–Output Format
Chapter Contents
Output Format and Filtering by ESP
Click this button to
bring up the Output
Format menu.
13–Output Format
Note: Allow a few
seconds for the
menus to display.
Output Format/Filtering by Serial Command
old
cmds
new
cmds
Extraction Mode
KS
K740,
<K740,output #,start position,length>
Insertion Mode
Ku
K741,
<K741,output #,length,hex string>
Assignment Command
KJ
K742,
<K742,label number,status>
Output Format Status
Kl
K743,
<K743,output format status>
Command Title
Ordered Output
K744,
Number of Filters
K745,
13-2
Format
<K744, filter#,code type,length,wildcard character,
placeholder character,data>
<K745,number of filters involved>
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 13 Output Format and Filtering
Output Format/Filtering by Embedded Menu
For information on accessing the embedded menus, see “Embedded Menus” on page
A-23.
From the Main menu, scroll down through the options and select the following screen:
13–Output Format
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
13-3
Overview of Output Format/Filtering
Overview of Output Format/Filtering
Output Format consists of a set of criteria expressed in Extraction and Insertion
serial or ESP menu commands that can be chained together to control the presentation of data that is transmitted from decoded bar code labels. If a label does not
meet the defined criteria, it is treated as a noread.
Note that Extraction and Insertion functions are independent of Ordered Output
criteria. The output format control can also work with all standard read modes such
as Matchcode, Multilabel etc.
Commands can be chained together in an array of as many as 100 steps and applied
to any label.
Output Format Status
13–Output Format
Definition:
ESP:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Output Format Status is a “master switch” that controls Output
Format. Extraction and/or Insertion commands must be defined
before an output occurs.
When you setup Output
Format in the ESP Output
Format menu and click on
Apply in the same menu,
Output Format Status
will be changed to Enable
in the scanner and displayed as such in the Outputs configuration menu
after you send a Retrieve
Scanner Settings command.
You can also enable/disable Output Format from
the Outputs menu by double-clicking on Output
Format.
<K743,output format status>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Note: Output Format Status must be enabled in order for any Output Format
commands to function.
13-4
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 13 Output Format and Filtering
Extraction Mode
Definition:
Usage:
Selects a portion of a bar code data to be transmitted and ignores the
rest.
Useful in scanning labels in which only a portion or portions of the bar
code data needs to be transmitted and sorted.
Extraction by ESP
1. Click on Read Label.
This will display in the
current bar code data
under Original.
2. Select text to be
extracted
13–Output Format
3. Click on Extract
4. Click on Apply or
proceed with additional extractions and
insertions.
Note: When you click Apply, Label #1 in
Label Output Format Status window will
automatically be enabled.
5. Click on Test
Figure 13-1 Output Format Extraction
After selecting and entering the extracted portion or portions of a label, you can proceed to Insertion mode where user-selectable ASCII text can be inserted. You can
perform up to 100 instances in extraction and insertion for all labels being scanned in
the read cycle. See “Advanced Output Format by ESP” on page 13-9.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
13-5
Extraction Mode
Extraction by Serial Command
Output #
Definition:
ESP:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
An Output # identifies the step involved in an output format process.
For example, if the routine involves a series of 6 Extraction and/or
Insertion steps, each of these steps is controlled by assigning sequential output numbers from 1 to 4.
Output # appears in the Advanced Formatting tab.
<K740,output #,start position,length>
(none) Must be entered.
1 to 100
Start Position
13–Output Format
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Specifies the precise character in the data sequence (from left to right)
where the selection for output begins.
<K740,output #,start position,length>
0 (Zero is disabled. It also marks the end of a format cell array.)
0 to maximum characters per label (zero is disabled)
Length
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
13-6
Specifies the length of the output string.
<K740,output #,start position,length>
0
0 to maximum characters per label (zero is disabled)
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 13 Output Format and Filtering
Insertion Mode
Definition:
Usage:
Inserts up to four characters at a time into a data output string. You
can add additional characters by repeating the procedure.
Useful in adding designators or separators to add meaning or content
to data in applications where label data needs to be sorted.
Note: Insertion by ESP is much simpler than by serial command because the text and
sequences can be visually verified.
Insertion by ESP
Up to 4 ASCII characters can be inserted at any point in bar code input and added to
the output. After scanning in a bar code label and selecting the original characters for
extraction, as shown in “Extraction by ESP” on page 13-5, do the following:
1. Click on Insert.
13–Output Format
2. Type in text to be inserted
or select ASCII character
from the ASCII selector
and click on Add to
Insertion Data.
3. Click on Apply. This will
append the insertion to the
end of the extracted data
under Format. In this case
Format will read SPN123.
4. You can now add another
extraction from the original
(for example 40) followed
by an insertion and another
extraction in any order or
sequence that you want it
to appear upon output.
Note: When you click
Apply, Label #1 in
Label Output Format
Status window will automatically be enabled.
Note: When you click
Apply, Label #1 in
Label Output Format
Status window will automatically be enabled.
5. Click on Apply when all insertions and extractions
are completed.
6. Click on Test to see resulting output.
Figure 13-2 Output Format Insertion
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
13-7
Insertion Mode
Insertion by Serial Command
Output #
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
An Output # identifies the step involved in an output format process.
For example, if the Output Format routine involved a series of four
Extraction and/or Insertion steps, each of these steps is controlled by
assigning sequential output numbers from 1 to 4.
<K741,output #,length,hex string>
(none) Must be entered.
1 to 100
Length
13–Output Format
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Specifies the length of the output string.
<K741,output #,length,hex string>
0 (A zero disables Length or can mark the end of a format cell array.)
0 to 4
Hex String
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
A pair of hex digits represent an ASCII character. Each pair of hex digits
ranges from 00 to FF. Each hex string has a maximum of 4 pairs.
For example, hex 65 = ‘e’, 6e = ‘n’, 64 = ‘d’, thus 656e64 = “end”
<K741,output #,length,hex string>
00
00 to FF
Output Format Examples by Serial Commands
A label with the data ABCDEFGH needs to be manipulated to output:
DEFGH@$ABCend.
The following commands are sent to achieve this setup:
<K740,1,4,5> for extraction mode, output# =1, start position = 4, length = 5.
<K741,2,2,4024> for extraction mode, output# = 2, start position = 4, length = 5.
Note that the hex pairs 40 and 24 = @$ in ASCII.
<K740,3,,3> for extraction mode, output# = 3, start position = 4, length = 5.
<K741,4,3,656e64> Note that 656e64 = “end”.
<K741,0> This ends the sequence and could have been done with a 740 command,
as well.
13-8
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 13 Output Format and Filtering
Advanced Output Format by ESP
Advanced Formatting allows you to view and edit up to 100 formatting steps.
Typically, extraction and insertion entries are made in the Output Format screen(figure 13-3) and viewed on the Advanced Formatting screen (figure 13-3). You can
also make adjustments in the Advanced Formatting screen by double-clicking on
any of the rows.
Double-click in any
row to bring up the
Output Format
Settings dialog.
13–Output Format
Click Insertion
Mode to enable the
Insertion box.
Figure 13-3 Advanced Formatting Screen
You can insert data into the Insertion entry box in the Output Format Settings dialog. However the data can only be entered as binary hex pairs. These must be even
numbers and cannot exceed four pairs. For example, entering 3031323334 in Insertion will result in 1234 when the Test button in the Output Format tab is clicked.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
13-9
Multilabel Output Format Assignment
Multilabel Output Format Assignment
Label Output Format Status corresponds directly with labels setup in Multilabel. If
Number of Labels in Multilabel is set to the default 1, then only Label #1 in Label
Output Format Status will be enabled. See “Multilabel” on page 4-16.
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Specifies the label in a multilabel operation to which output format status is being applied.
Allows the user to set up as many labels that are already assigned in
Multilabel for output and filter formatting.
<K742, label number,status>
0
1 to 12, as applicable to label number.
Output Format Status by ESP
13–Output Format
Note: Label Output Format Status table is found on the right side of the Output Format
tab in the Output Format menu.
Double-click on this line to
bring up the popup on the
left for label #2.
Figure 13-4 Multilabel Output Format Status
Special Rules for using Multilabel with Output Format
1. Unless you want to assign output formatting to more than one label at a time in
your multilabel sequence, disable all labels except the one to which you are applying the output formatting.
2. The 12 labels in Label Output Format Status correspond with multilabels; the
12 filters in Ordered Output apply only to the order of output and have no relationship to Multilabel or Label Output Format Status.
13-10
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 13 Output Format and Filtering
Ordered Output/Filtering
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Ordered Output involves filtering and ordering.
In the filtering stage, each label in a read cycle is read and matched
against a user-defined table of up to 12 filters which search on code
type, code length and data contents. A given label must meet all three
criteria in any one of the filters in order to be included.
In the ordering stage, labels are transmitted in the order that they
match up with the filters. A label matching filter #1 will transmit first,
another matching filter #2 will transmit next, and so forth.
Useful in sorting several bar code labels into multiple categories with
specific fields and a defined order of output.
<K744,filter#,code type,length,wildcard character,placeholder character,data>
Ordered Output/Filtering by ESP
13–Output Format
Click on the Ordered Output tab.
Click on Send to send all settings to the scanner.
Double-click on this row to
bring up the popup on the left
for filter #1
Use this option to limit the
code length
Type in data that you want the
label to match
Use this option to enter a control character on the Matching
line above
This allows you to define the
wildcard and placeholder
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
13-11
Ordered Output/Filtering
Ordered Output/Filtering by Embedded Menu
Embedded
Menu:
Ordered Output/Filtering by Serial Command
13–Output Format
Filter #
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
The filter sequence number from 1 to 12
<K744,filter#,code type,length,wildcard character,placeholder character,data>
0
Range 1 to 12
Code Type
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
User-assigned code type that the scanner will search for.
If a match is found, the scanner then checks Length.
<K744,filter#,code type,length,wildcard character,placeholder character,data>
0
(Same as available in the Code Types setup menus)
Length
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
13-12
User-assigned code length that the scanner will search for.
If the length is found, the scanner then checks Wild Card.
<K744,filter#,code type,length,wildcard character,placeholder character,data>
0 (any length)
0 to 128
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 13 Output Format and Filtering
Wildcard Character
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Wildcard Character indicates that any number of characters that follow the wildcard will be regarded as matches.
For example, “123*” will match “123”, “123456”, “123ABC”, but not
“12”.
Filter data ”123*AB?C” will be interpreted as “123*”
Both Wildcard Character and Placeholder Character can be mixed
in the same filter data.
<K744,filter#,code type,length,wildcard character,placeholder character,data>
2A (*)
Any pairings of hex digits representing an ASCII character; for
example, 2A = *
(00 = disabled)
Placeholder Character
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Placeholder Character is a type of wild card that requires identical
data position.
For example, Filter data “123?”, will match all of the “1234”, “123A”,
but not “123”, “12345”, “1234C”.
Filter data “123?A” will match “1234A” and “123BA”, but not “123”,
“1234C” or “1234ABCD”
Both Wildcard Character and Placeholder Character can be mixed
in the same filter data.
<K744,filter#,code type,length,wildcard character,placeholder character,data>
3F (?)
Any ASCII input as pair of hex digit; e.g., 3F=’?’
(00 = disabled)
Wildcard/Placeholder Matches
Both Wildcard Character and Placeholder Character can be mixed in the same filter data.
You can regard wildcard marks as the end of matching, whereas a placeholder
requires identical data both before and after the placeholder.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
13-13
13–Output Format
Definition:
Ordered Output/Filtering
For example:
Filter data “123*” matches “123”, “123456”, “123ABC” but not “12”.
Filter data “123*AB?C” will be interpreted as “123*”
Filter data “123?A?” matches “1234AB”, “123BAT”, but not “1234A” or “123BATS”.
Filter data “12??*” matches “1234”, “123456”, “123ABC”, but not “12”, “123”.
Filter data “123?A*” matches “1234A”, “123BA”, “123BATS”, but not “1234”, “1234C”.
For example:
<K745,1> enables Output Filters #1 setting.
<K745,3> enables Output Filters #1 to filter #3’s setting.
<K745,0> disables all output filters. The reader will not perform any filtered output.
Data
13–Output Format
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
User-assigned data that the scanner will search for.
<K744,filter#,code type,length,wildcard character,placeholder character,data>
Null
Any pairing of hex digits representing ASCII characters;
e.g., 41422A = “AB*”
(00 = disabled)
Number of Filters
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
The number of filters that labels will be compared against, up to the
specified number. For example, entering 7 means that filters #1
through #7 will be enabled.
<K745,number of filters involved>
0
0 to 12
Any number from 1 to 12 enables Output Filtering. A zero (0) disables
Output Filtering. The reader will not perform any filtered output.
13-14
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 13 Output Format and Filtering
Examples:
Filter #1
Code type = Code 39, Length = disabled, Wildcard = ‘*’, placeholder = ‘?’,
data = “AB*” = 41422A
<K744,1,3,0,2A,3F,41422a>
Filter #2
Code type = Code 128, Length = 8, Wildcard = ‘*’, placeholder = ‘?’,
data = “NBC??FGH” = 4e42433f3f464748.
<K744,2,4,8,2A,3F,4e42433f3f464748>
<K745,2> enables Ordered Output. It also enables filter#1 and filter#2.
Let’s say we have four labels, “NBCXYFGH”, “NBDXYFGH”, “123XYZ”, “ABCDE”. The
reader will registered two good reads only and transmit the following:“ABCDE”,
“NBCXYFGH”.
13–Output Format
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
13-15
Master Database in ESP
Master Database in ESP
13–Output Format
When you click the Master Database tab in the Output Format menu, you bring up
a table for convenient entry of master label data for up to 10 entries. See “Master
Label Database” on page 11-11 for details.
13-16
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter
Discrete I/0
14
Chapter Contents
Input 1 .......................................................................................................14-4
Output 1.....................................................................................................14-5
Output 2...................................................................................................14-10
Output 3...................................................................................................14-10
Diagnostic Outputs ..................................................................................14-11
Note: The characters NULL <> and , can only be entered through embedded menus,
not through ESP or serial commands.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
14-1
14–Discrete I/0
This section includes instructions for setting up conditions for changing input/output
electrical transitions for control of internal and external devices. A discrete I/O (in/
out) signal is an electrical transition from one voltage level to another so that digital
switching can occur.
Discrete I/O by ESP Menu
Click this button to bring up
the Outputs menu.
To change a setting,
double-click the
setting and use your
curser to scroll
through the options.
Discrete I/O by Serial Command
14–Discrete I/0
Command Title
old
cmds
Diagnostic Output
new
cmds
K713,
Input 1
KK
K730,
Output 1
Kv
K720,
Output 2
Kw
K721,
Output 3
K‘
K722,
Scanner I/O Status
Request
14-2
KX?
Format
<K713,output#,status1,status2,status3,status4,
status5,status6,status7,status8,status9>
<K730, mode,active state>
<K720,output on,active state,pulse width,output
mode,trend analysis mode,trigger evaluation period,number to output on,reads per trigger threshold>
<K721, output on,active state,pulse width,output
mode,trend analysis mode,trigger evaluation period,number to output on,reads per trigger threshold>
<K722, output on,active state,pulse width,output
mode,trend analysis mode,trigger evaluation period,number to output on,reads per trigger threshold>
K899? <K899?>
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 14 Discrete I/0
Discrete I/O by Embedded Menus
For information on accessing the embedded menus, see “Embedded Menus” on page
A-23.
From the Main menu, scroll down through the options and select the following screen:
14–Discrete I/0
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
14-3
Input 1
Input 1
Definition:
Usage:
A programmable, discrete input used to reset counters, outputs or control optoelectrical settings.
For example, an application is setup so that a mismatch stops the production line by using outputs in a latch mode (see “Output Mode”). A
push button switch can be connected to the input pin so that when
pressed, it unlatches the output, allowing the line to resume operations.
Input Mode
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Determines the functionality of the input.
<K730,input mode,active state>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Reset Counts
2 = Unlatch Output
Disabled
Definition:
When set to Disabled there is no effect on operation.
Reset Counts
14–Discrete I/0
Definition:
Usage:
When set to Reset Counts, a transition to the active state of the input
will cause the scanner to reset the internal counters. (See “File Transfer”).
Primarily used in test mode. Can also be used to reset counters daily.
Unlatch Output
Definition:
This setting is used in combination with any of the three discrete outputs that are in Unlatch Mode 1 (see “Latch Mode 1 (Unlatch on Discrete Input 1)” on page 14-7). A transition to the active state will clear
any of the three outputs that were previously latched.
Active State
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
14-4
Sets the active level of the input pin.
<K730,input mode,active state>
Active Off (IOFF)
0 = Active On (ION)1 = Active Off (IOFF)
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 14 Discrete I/0
Output 1
Definition:
Usage:
Sets the discrete output functions for specific user-selected conditions.
This option provides switching to host software to control external
devices such as PLCs and relays. It is useful for routing and sorting and
to prevent mis-packaging and mis-routing.
Output On
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Allows the user to set the conditions under which an output (or outputs) will be activated.
<K720,output on,active state,pulse width,output mode,trend analysis
mode,trigger evaluation period,number to output on,reads per trigger
threshold>
Noread
0 = Mismatch Or Noread
1 = Match (or good read)
2 = Mismatch
3 = Noread
4 = Trend Analysis
Note: If Output On is set to Mismatch Or Noread, Match, or Mismatch, a transition (switching) will not occur unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master label
is loaded into memory.
Mismatch or Noread
Definition:
Match
Definition:
Activates a discrete output when the bar code data matches the master
label.
Note: If you want to output for a good read and Matchcode is not
enabled, you can enable any output for Match.
Mismatch
Definition:
Activates a discrete output whenever the bar code data does not match
that of the master label.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
14-5
14–Discrete I/0
Activates discrete output when the bar code data does not match that
of the master label or the bar code has not been decoded before the
end of the read cycle.
Output 1
Noread
Definition:
Activates a discrete output whenever the bar code data is not decoded
before the end of the read cycle.
Trend Analysis
Definition:
Usage:
Activates discrete output when a trend analysis condition is met,
depending on the trend analysis option enabled.
Typically used when a discrete indication of a low read quality condition
occurs.
Active State
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Sets the active state of the discrete output.
<K720,output on,active state,pulse width,output mode,trend analysis
mode,trigger evaluation period,number to output on,reads per trigger
threshold>
Normally Open
0 = Normally Closed
1 = Normally Open
Pulse Width
Definition:
14–Discrete I/0
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
14-6
Sets the time in 10 mS increments that the discrete output remains
active.
<K720,output on,active state,pulse width,output mode,trend analysis
mode,trigger evaluation period,number to output on,reads per trigger
threshold>
5 (.05 seconds). Corresponds to 50 mS displayed in the menu.
1 to 255 (0.01 to 2.55 seconds). Divide the number entered on the
command line by 100 for time in seconds.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 14 Discrete I/0
Output Mode
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Sets the condition in which the discrete output is de-activated.
<K720,output on,active state,pulse width,output mode,trend analysis
mode,trigger evaluation period,number to output on,reads per trigger
threshold>
Pulse
0 = Pulse
1 = Latch Mode 1
2 = Latch Mode 2
3 = Latch Mode 3
Pulse
Definition:
This is the default mode of operation in which the programmable output
is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held
active for the duration of the selected pulse width.
Latch Mode 1 (Unlatch on Discrete Input 1)
Definition:
The programmable output is active when the Output On condition has
been met and held active until the discrete Input 1 has been activated.
Latch Mode 2 (Unlatch Opposite Condition)
Definition:
The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition
has been met and held active until the opposite condition selected
under Output On has been met.
For example, if Noread is enabled under Output On, the programmable output will go active upon a noread and remain active until the
opposite condition, a good read, occurs.
Definition:
The programmable output is active when the Output On condition has
been met and is held active until a new read cycle begins.
NOTE: All of the Output On modes are inhibited when any Output on Warning is
active for Output 1 (see <K713> command).
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
14-7
14–Discrete I/0
Latch Mode 3 (Unlatch Enter Read Cycle)
Output 1
Trend Analysis Mode
Definition:
Sets the trend condition (Mismatch, Noread, or Reads/Trigger) that
will activate the output.
Parameters associated with Trend Analysis Mode are Number To Output On and Trigger Evaluation Period. The Number To Output On setting allows the user to select the number of times that the selected trend
condition occurs before activating the output. Trigger Evaluation Period
sets the number of triggered events to evaluate for trend condition.
Example:
Trend analysis mode = Noread
Number to Output On =4
Trigger Evaluation Period=25
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
In this example, the scanner will activate the output when 4 noreads
occur within a period of 25 trigger events (read cycles).
Useful in cases in which the user doesn’t want to shut down for one
condition but wants to monitor quality and read conditions.
<K720,output on,active state,pulse width,output mode,trend analysis
mode,trigger evaluation period,number to output on,reads per trigger
threshold>
Noread
0 = Mismatch
1 = Noread
2 = Reads/Trigger
Mismatch
14–Discrete I/0
Definition:
Output will be activated when the number of Mismatches equals the
value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window
selected in Trigger Evaluation Period.
Noread
Definition:
The output will be activated when the number of noreads equals the
value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window
selected in Trigger Evaluation Period.
Reads per Trigger Threshold
Definition:
14-8
The Reads/Trigger trend monitors the number of good reads per triggered read cycle. If the number of Reads/Trigger falls below the
value entered in Reads per Trigger Threshold, a trend condition is
set. If this trend condition matches the number set in Number to Output On, the output will be activated.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 14 Discrete I/0
Trigger Evaluation Period
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
The number of trigger events to examine within the trend analysis
event.
<K720,output on,active state,pulse width,output mode,trend analysis
mode,trigger evaluation period,number to output on,reads per trigger threshold>
0
0 to 255
Number Before Output
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Sets the number of events (matches, mismatches, or noreads as configured by Output On) that must occur before activating the associated
output.
<K720,output on,active state,pulse width,output mode,trend analysis
mode,trigger evaluation period,number to output on,reads per trigger threshold>
0
0 to 255
Reads per Trigger Threshold
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
14-9
14–Discrete I/0
Helpful
Hints:
When Reads/Trigger trend analysis mode is enabled, the Reads per
Trigger Threshold value is the minimum number of successful reads
required during a read cycle.
You can determine the expected number of scans during a read cycle
by multiplying the enabled Number of Scans per second times the
number of seconds in the read cycle. You can also use Quality Output
(see “Quality Output”) to observe the number of successful reads.
<K720,output on,active state,pulse width,output mode,trend analysis
mode,trigger evaluation period,number to output on,reads per trigger
threshold>
0
0 to 65,535
Output 2
Output 2
Serial Cmd:
<K721,output on,active state,pulse width,output mode,trend analysis
mode,trigger evaluation period,number to output on,reads per trigger
threshold>
Output 2 has the same parameters and default settings as Output 1.
Output 3
Serial Cmd:
<K722,output on,active state,pulse width,output mode,trend analysis
mode,trigger evaluation period,number to output on,reads per trigger
threshold>
14–Discrete I/0
Output 3 has the same parameters and default settings as Output 1.
14-10
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 14 Discrete I/0
Diagnostic Outputs
Note: See Chapter 15, “Diagnostics” for definitions and setup of Diagnostic Warnings.
Definition:
Usage:
ESP:
Warning messages conditions relating to the MS-880 performance and
environment can be programmed to activate selected outputs (Output 1,
Output 2, or Output 3) whenever a warning condition occurs.
Useful where output warnings of scanner malfunctions can be integrated to alert users and/or shut down a line.
Click the Output Format and select the Diagnostic Outputs tab to
bring up the table below:
Serial Cmd:
<K713,output #,status1,status2,status3,status4,status5,status6,
status7,status8,status9>
A <K?> command returns three separate verification responses, one
for each output. A <K713?,n> command returns a verification
response for one selected output (n=1,2,3).
For example, in order to cause Output 3 to become active in response
to any warning enabled message, issue this command:
<K3,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1>.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
14-11
14–Discrete I/0
Double-click the appropriate cell under Outputs and
enable/disable output in the
popup on the left.
Diagnostic Outputs
Output
Definition:
Function:
Serial Cmd:
Options:
Selects the status settings for one of three outputs (Output 1, Output
2, or Output 3).
Each of the three outputs is independently associated with ten status
settings. The settings can be accessed to verify/change one output at
a time.
<K713, output #,status1,status2,status3,status4,status5,status6,
status7,status8,status9>
1 = Logic output 1
2 = Logic output 2
3 = Logic output 3
Status
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
When enabled, the error condition will cause the selected output to
become active.
<K713, output #,status1,status2,status3,status4,status5,
status6,status7,status8,status9>
Disabled (each can be independently enabled)
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
status1 = Laser Current Low
status2 = Laser Current High
14–Discrete I/0
status3 = Temperature Low
status4 = Temperature High
status5 = Diagnostics Flash Corrupt
status6 = Laser Ref. Corrupt
status7 = Product lifetime exceeded
status8 = Factory settings defaulted
status9 = Customer settings defaulted
Note: When enabled, the error condition will override all other operational modes
configured for the output.
14-12
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter
Diagnostics
15
Chapter Contents
Warning Messages ................................................................................15-4
High Temperature Threshold .................................................................15-8
Low Temperature Threshold..................................................................15-9
Lifetime Hours......................................................................................15-10
Present Ambient Temperature (deg. C)...............................................15-11
Counts .................................................................................................15-12
Time Since Last Reset.........................................................................15-13
This section describes warning and operating messages and their settings.
Important: Since Warning Messages and NOVRAM Messages are not enabled by
default, these messages will not be displayed. However, if you suspect that erroneous
defaults are occurring, enable Warning Messages and NOVRAM Messages by
sending <K400,1,,,1>.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
15-1
15–Diagnostics
Note: The characters NULL <> and , can only be entered through embedded menus,
not through ESP or serial commands.
Diagnostics by ESP Menu
Click this button
to bring up the
Diagnostic
menu.
To change a setting,
double-click the
setting and use your
curser to scroll
through the options.
Diagnostics by Serial Command
Old
Cmds
15–Diagnostics
Command Title
New
Cmds
Format
Warning Message Status
K”
Lifetime Hours
Over-temperature
Under-temperature
Laser Overcurrent
Laser Undercurrent
Power-on/Resets Counts
Time Since Last Reset
Present Operating
Temperature
K$
K+
KK;
K:
K_
K@?
<K400,warning message status,laser high status,laser
low status,novram/reset warning status>
K401, <K401,hours10,message>
K402, <K402,degrees,message>
K403, <K403,degrees,message>
K404, <K404,message>
K405, <K405,message>
K406, <K406,powerups,resets>
K407? <K407?> returns: hours,minutes (read only)
K%?
K408? <K408?> returns: deg (read only)
15-2
K400,
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 15 Diagnostics
Diagnostics by Embedded Menu
For information on accessing the embedded menus, see “Embedded Menus” on page
A-23.
From the Main menu, scroll down through the options and select the following screen:
15–Diagnostics
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
15-3
Warning Messages
Warning Messages
Important Note: Warning Message Status must be enabled before any warnings
in this menu can be displayed.
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Warning messages that relate to the environment and condition of the
scanner can be defined and set to activate specific outputs.
Note: When enabled, the error condition will override all other operational modes configured for the output.
When enabled, laser current and NOVRAM warning messages will be
transmitted to the host or any active port whenever the pre-defined
conditions are met.
These messages serve as a flag to service a scanner or as an early
warning that potential problems could arise. They are particularly useful in factories that run 24/7 and can’t afford down time.
<K400,warning message status,laser high status,laser low status,
novram/reset warning status>
Warning Message Status
Function:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
15–Diagnostics
Default:
Options:
When enabled, warning messages will be transmitted to the host or any
active port.
Note: This option must be enabled before any other warning messages
can be transmitted.
Alerts the user to impending failures or conditions that may soon cause
failures.
<K400,warning message status,laser high status,laser low status,
novram/reset warning status>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
15-4
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 15 Diagnostics
Laser High Warning
Transmits a message whenever the laser current exceeds a factory-calibrated reference value which cannot be altered. The message repeats once every 30 minutes until
the condition is corrected.
Laser High Status
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Enables the Laser High message.
Alerts the user to impending laser failure. (Contact Microscan Service.)
<K400,warning message status,laser high status,laser low status,
novram/reset warning status>
Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Laser High Message
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Defines the Laser High message.
<K404,laser high message>
HIGH-LASER
Any 1 to 10 character ASCII string except NUL, <, or >.
15–Diagnostics
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
15-5
Warning Messages
Laser Low Warning
When enabled a message up to 10-characters is transmitted whenever the laser current falls below a factory-calibrated reference value which cannot be altered. The
message repeats once every 30 minutes until the condition is corrected.
Laser Low Status
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Enables the Laser Low message.
Alerts the user to impending laser failure. (Contact Microscan Service.)
<K400,warning message status,laser high status,laser low status,
novram/reset warning status>
Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Laser Low Message
Definition:
15–Diagnostics
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
When enabled a message up to 10-characters is transmitted whenever
the laser current falls below a factory-calibrated reference value which
cannot be altered. The message repeats once every 30 minutes until
the condition is corrected.
Defines the Laser Low message.
<K405,laser low message>
LOW-LASER
Any 1 to 10 character ASCII string except NUL, <, or >.
15-6
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 15 Diagnostics
NOVRAM Corrupt Warning Status
When enabled, a 7 character message is sent whenever the system detects a warning
condition.
Important Note: Warning Corrupt Message Status must be enabled before the
NOVRAM message in this menu can be transmitted.
Function:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
When enabled, a 7 character message is sent whenever the system
detects a warning condition.
However, if you suspect that erroneous defaults are occurring, enable
NOVRAM Messages by sending <K400,1,,,1>. This will allow the
NOVRAM messages, if present, to be viewed.
Alerts the user to NOVRAM failure. (Contact Microscan Service.)
<K400,warning message status,laser high status,laser low status,
novram reset warning status>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Warning messages for NOVRAM can appear in one of five formats:
<NVRAM-C>
This message indicates an error in user settings. The message repeats once every 30
minutes. If this message is received, restore customer settings and send a <Z> command.
If the condition persists, call customer service.
<NVBAD-D>
Indicates that diagnostic lifetime hours, power-on counts, and reset counts have been
lost. The message repeats once every 30 minutes. (Contact Microscan Service.)
<NVBAD-L>
Indicates a problem with laser current factory reference. The message repeats once
every 30 minutes. (Contact Microscan Service.)
<DFALT-C>
Indicates that the customer NOVRAM settings have been defaulted either by a customer initiated default or by a problem with the scanner. This message is sent ONLY
ONCE.
Indicates that the factory NOVRAM settings have been defaulted. This message is sent
ONLY ONCE upon reset. (Contact Microscan Service.)
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
15-7
15–Diagnostics
<DFALT-F>
High Temperature Threshold
High Temperature Threshold
A message can be defined that will display when a user-set High Temperature
Threshold has been reached. The message repeats once every 30 minutes until the
condition is corrected. This value is a reference to the external ambient temperature
in the environment around the scanner.
High Temperature Degrees
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
A user can set a temperature value that when exceeded will cause a
high temperature message to be displayed. If High Temperature
Threshold is set to zero, then the warning message will be disabled
Helps ensure that the scanner is being used within its temperature
specification. Also, since hotter environments tend to shorten the life of
electronics components, a user may want to set the temperature
threshold closer to the nominal temperature of 25°.
<K402,degrees,message>
50° Celsius
0° to 50°, zero disables.
High Temperature Message
Definition:
15–Diagnostics
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
The user can enter a 10-character message that will be displayed
whenever High Temperature Threshold is exceeded.
<K402,degrees,message>
HIGH_TEMP
Any 1 to 10 character ASCII string except NUL, <, or >.
15-8
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 15 Diagnostics
Low Temperature Threshold
A message can be defined that will display when a user-set Low Temperature
Threshold has been reached. The message repeats once every 30 minutes until the
condition is corrected. This value is a reference to the external ambient temperature
in the environment around the scanner.
Low Temperature Degrees
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
The user can set a low temperature value that whenever the ambient
temperature falls below it causes a low temperature message to be displayed. If Low Temperature Threshold is set to zero, the warning
message will be disabled.
Helps ensure that the scanner is being used within its temperature
specification.
<K403,degrees,message>
1° Celsius
0° to 50°, zero disables.
Low Temperature Message
Definition:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
The user can enter a 10-character message that will be displayed
whenever the ambient temperature falls below the Low Temperature
Threshold.
<K403, degrees,message>
LOW_TEMP
Any 1 to 10 character ASCII string except NUL, <, or >.
15–Diagnostics
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
15-9
Lifetime Hours
Lifetime Hours
A message can be defined that will be transmitted whenever the scanner’s elapsed
time clock exceeds the set hours threshold. The message repeats one time every 30
minutes.
Hours Threshold
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
A user can set a time in hours that will cause a message to be sent
whenever the scanner’s run time exceeds this value.
The elapsed time is the time the scanner is powered up.
Useful for setting up a preventive maintenance program.
<K401, hours10,message>
2500 (actually 25,000 hours)
0 to 65534
Note: Hours entered are 1/10 of the actual hours.
Message
Definition:
15–Diagnostics
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
A user can define message up to 10-characters that will be displayed
whenever the hours threshold is reached or exceeded.
<K401, hours10,message>
SERVICE
Any 1 to 10 character ASCII string except NUL, <, or >.
15-10
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 15 Diagnostics
Present Ambient Temperature (deg. C)
(This command is READ ONLY.)
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Close estimation of external temperature.
A thermal sensor on the main PCB measures the internal temperature
of the scanner. From this a case-differential constant is subtracted to
yield an estimated external temperature.
Indicates temperature of the environment immediately outside of the
scanner. Useful for setting Over Temperature Threshold and Under
Temperature Threshold.
Send: <K408?>
Returns <K408 degrees Celsius>.
Note: When viewing the Present Operating Temperature, allow at least 20 minutes after startup for the scanner’s inside and outside temperatures to stabilize.
15–Diagnostics
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
15-11
Counts
Counts
(These commands are READ ONLY.)
Powerups
Definition
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Read Only
Ranges:
Returns the number of times the scanner has been re-powered or a
watchdog reset occurs.
Useful for detecting unwanted resets caused by power supply problems
or ESD transients.
Send <K406?>
Returns <K powerups,resets>
0 to 65,535 powerups, 0 to 65,535 resets.
Resets
Definition
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Resets include watchdog reset, <A>, <Z>, <Zd>, and hardware
defaults. A watchdog reset is a reset that is forced whenever the software locks-up.
Useful for detecting unwanted resets caused by power supply problems
or ESD transients.
Send <K406?>
Returns <K powerups,resets>
0 to 65,535 powerups, 0 to 65,535 resets.
15–Diagnostics
Read Only
Ranges:
15-12
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 15 Diagnostics
Time Since Last Reset
(This command is READ ONLY.)
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Records the number of hours and minutes of operation since the last
system reset.
Useful as a troubleshooting tool that can help pinpoint the cause of a
reset.
Send <K407?>
Returns <K407hours,minutes>
Read Only
Ranges:
0 to 23 hours, 0 to 59 minutes.
15–Diagnostics
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
15-13
15–Diagnostics
Time Since Last Reset
15-14
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Wiring Box Option
16
Chapter Contents
Wiring Box Description ..........................................................................16-2
Installation Steps ...................................................................................16-3
Wiring Box Ports ....................................................................................16-5
Wiring Box PCB with Connectors ..........................................................16-8
Mounting Plate .......................................................................................16-9
This section has instructions for assembling, wiring and using the MS-880 scanner’s
optional Wiring Box. When this option is selected, the Ms-880 scanner and wiring box
option are shipped as an assembly.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
16-1
16–Wiring Box
Chapter
16–Wiring Box
Wiring Box Description
Wiring Box Description
Flex cable to MS-880
Scanner
Portal hole,
3/4” pipe thread
(4 places)
Bottom mounting
plate of wiring box
Figure 16-1 Wiring Box
Note: Wiring Box PCB and Protocol Card (when used) reside inside the wiring box.
Portal Holes
The wiring box has four external portal holes which are standard 3/4” pipe thread.
Mounting of the box is with four through holes in flanges that extend out over the
ends.
Terminal Strip Specifications
Wire strip length: .24” (6 mm)
Wiring range: 14 - 28 AWG
Current: 13A maximum
16-2
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 16 Wiring Box Option
Note: For terminal details, see figure 16-2.
1. Connect power through portal holes (see “Connect the System” on page 1-3).
2. Temporarily apply power to the scanner and confirm that light next to input terminal is green and not red.
3. Disconnect power before making remainder of connections.
4. Connect host and trigger port wires through portal holes to appropriate connections.
5. Plug ribbon cable into scanner as shown below (apply pressure back and forth on
connector to ensure that it seats inside the receptacle).
Ribbon Cable
Bottom plate of
scanner attaches to
top of wiring box
Portal holes
3/4” pipe thread
(4 places)
Wiring box
Bottom mounting
plate of wiring box
Figure 16-2 Scanner/Wiring Box Assembly
6. If using the network protocol card, connect card to underside of scanner (see the
MS-880 Network Protocol User’s Manual (83-110015) for detailed information
about the network protocol cards).
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
16-3
16–Wiring Box
Installation Steps
16–Wiring Box
Installation Steps
7. Attach scanner to wiring box with 4 attached mounting screws in the bottom plate
of the scanner, taking care that gasket is evenly seated.
Mounting screws
4 places
Figure 16-3 Attaching the Scanner
8. Mount wiring box (see “Wiring Box Ports” on page 16-5).
16-4
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 16 Wiring Box Option
16–Wiring Box
Wiring Box Ports
(Refer to Figure 16-7 or actual PCB)
Relay Modules
Note: For relay modules kits, use MS P/N 98-000013-XX or equivalent
slim module which does not exceed 0.43” (11 mm) in width)
1.7" (1.1 cm)
0.43"
(1.1 cm)
3 Relay module
sockets
Locking screw
40-3100 08-0 1
REV. 2
K2
R E LA Y
P AS S
1
3
5
J10
33
2
4
6
JP1
34
J13
1
J9
J7
J8
JP3
JP2
1
2
3
4
5
6
J15
1
2
3
4
5
6
R E LA Y
P A SS
J17
2
MADE IN U.S.A.
J12
K3
43-31 0008 REV S/N :
K1
MICROSCA N
These can be used as
an alternative to the 3
optoisolated outputs
from the scanner
itself. K1, K2, and K3
are pluggable module
sockets for SM offthe-shelf AC/DC output/relay modules.
Relay modules are
installed as shown in
Figure 16-4.
1
2
3
5
6
+5
GND
+
–
RX+
TX+ TX–
RX–
GND CHS
R EL A Y 2 O U T RE LA Y 3 O U T
Figure 16-4 Relay Module
Default jumper positions
(using scanner's built-in
relay)
1
3
5
New jumper position
(using pluggable
1
3
5
2
4
6
2
4
6
JP1
JP1
JP2 JP3
40-31000 8-01
REV. 2
K1
K2
RE L A Y
1
PASS
3
5
J10
33
JP 1
J13
1
1
3
5
34
J8
J9
J7
K3
JP3
JP2
2
4
6
J15
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
R EL A Y
P A SS
J17
MADE IN U.S.A.
J12
2
4
6
M ICROSCAN
When installing relay
modules in K1, K2,
and K3, corresponding jumpers (J1, J2,
J3) need to be moved
as shown in Figure
16-5. Move jumpers
from 3-5 to 1-3 and
4-6 to 2-4 for each
relay to be installed
(K1, K2, K3).
43-310008REVS/N:
Jumpers
1
2
3
5
6
+5
GND
+
–
TX+ TX–
RX+
RX–
GND CHS
R ELA Y 2 O U T
R EL AY 3 O U T
Figure 16-5 Relay Jumpers
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
16-5
Relay Terminals.
Relay 2
terminal
40-310008-01
REV. 2
K1
K2
R EL AY
PA SS
2
4
6
J10
33
JP1
J13
34
J7
J8
1
J9
K3
JP3
JP2
1
2
3
4
5
6
J15
1
2
R EL AY
3
4
P A SS
5
6
2
J17
M A D E I N U . S. A .
J12
1
3
5
Relay 3
terminal
M ICR OSCA N
Relay 1
terminal
4 3 -3 1 0 0 0 8 REVS/N:
16–Wiring Box
Wiring Box Ports
1
2
3
5
6
+5 GND
+
–
TX+ TX– RX+ RX– GND CHS
RE LAY 2 O U T R ELAY 3 O U T
Figure 16-6 Relay Module
Relay terminals 1, 2, and 3 provide output for both internal optoisolated outputs and
alternative relay modules that can be installed in modules K1, K2, and K3.
Relay1 Output handles discrete outputs from the scanner that will switch up to
100 mA of opto-isolated current. See MS-880 Network Protocol Card User’s Manual
(83-110015) for connections.
Field Bus Port (J10)
Used with an optional protocol card to connect as a node from a network wired
directly into this terminal strip.
+5 VDC
Voltage out that can drive a hand held scanner. Maximum current is 5 watts.
Input 1
Used to wire a switch to reset latch mode or counters.
RS-422/485
Used for multidrop or 422 port.
Power 10-28 VDC
Power input port (left side and right side for connectivity convenience).
16-6
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 16 Wiring Box Option
Main serial communication port. (See Table A-7, “Host 25-pin Connector,” on page A-8.)
Aux RS-232
Daisy chain and auxiliary connections. (See Table A-7, “Host 25-pin Connector,” on page
A-8.)
New Master Pin
Allows you to wire in a switch for New Master Pin. (See “Optoisolator Inputs” on page
A-11.)
Trigger Port (NPN)
To initiate the read cycle. (See “Optoisolator Inputs” on page A-11.)
Power LED
GREEN means the polarity of the input connections is correct; RED means it is
reversed.
Caution: While the MS-880 scanner has reverse polarity protection built in to its circuitry, the wiring box does not protect external circuits that may already be wired in
when power is applied.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
16-7
16–Wiring Box
RS-232
16-8
1
3
5
J1
P OW ER
10-28VDC
P+
P
-
RE LAY 1 O U T
J12
PA S S
RE LA Y
1
JP1
SH LD
2
4
6
K1
2
3
J13
4
34
J2
R TS R X
RS232
FIELDBUS
CTS
M2
M1
33
5
GND
6
TX
GN D
+
SHLD
RX
GND
J6
-
TX
INPUT1
J7
J10
AUX RS232
+5VDC
+5
J8
K2
TX -
-
J5
+
RX+
RX-
SHLD
RS422/485
NEWMASTER
TX+
J9
5
1
3
P-
2
4
6
G ND C H S
JP2
J3
TRIG P +
TRIGGER
2
1
40-310008-01
REV. 2
J15
1
3
5
JP3
M4
J17
P AS S
R ELA Y
J4
D1
MICROSCAN
PO WER LE D
10-28VD C
MADE IN U.S.A.
G REE N= OK
R ED = RV S.PO L.
RELAY 3 OUT
6
2
4
POW ER
10-28VD C
P+
P
-
RELAY 2 OUT
M3
K3
43-310008REVS/N:
16–Wiring Box
Wiring Box PCB with Connectors
Wiring Box PCB with Connectors
Polarity Indicator
Green, if connected
correctly,
Red if incorrect.
Figure 16-7 Wiring Box PCB
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 16 Wiring Box Option
.40"
(10.2mm)
16–Wiring Box
Mounting Plate
7.175" (18.2 mm)
2.90"
(73.7mm)
2 X PE M B SO A- 86 32 -2 0
O R EQ UIVA L ENT
.413"
(10.4 mm)
1.81"
(46.0mm)
4.39" (11.15 mm)
Figure 16-8 Wiring Box Bottom Plate
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
16-9
16–Wiring Box
Mounting Plate
16-10
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter
Utilities
17
File Transfer ..............................................................................................17-5
Counters ....................................................................................................17-6
Part Number ..............................................................................................17-8
Checksum .................................................................................................17-9
Read Rate ...............................................................................................17-10
Device Control .........................................................................................17-12
Code Type ...............................................................................................17-13
Defaulting/Saving/Initializing ...................................................................17-13
Utility commands are generally commands that are performed during scanner operations to check read rates, determine read rates or perform miscellaneous operations
on scanner hardware. Serial utility commands are not prefaced with a “K”and a
numeric code. Nor do they require an initialization command (<A> and <Z>). They
can be entered from within any terminal program or from within ESP-MP in the Terminal window or the window adjacent to the Utilities menu.
Note: The characters NULL <> and , can only be entered through embedded menus,
not through ESP or serial commands.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
17-1
17–Utilities
Chapter Contents
Utilities by ESP Menu
17–Utilities
Click this button to
bring up the Utilities
menu.
To change a setting,
right-click the setting and use your
curser to scroll
through the options.
Note: Utility commands are not accessible by embedded menus.
17-2
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 17 Utilities
Utilities by Serial Command
Table 17-1 Summary of Utility Serial Commands
Command Type
Counter Request
and Clear
Read Rate
Read Rate
Device
Control
Code Types
Commands
Trigger
Name
Noread Counter
Noread Counter Reset
Trigger Counter
Trigger Counter Reset
Good Read/Match Counter
Good Read/Match Counter Reset
Mismatch Counter
Mismatch Counter Reset
Display all three Checksums of Flash memory
Display Checksum for Boot Code
Display Checksum for Application Code
Display both Part Numbers
Display Boot Code Part Number
Display Application Code Part Number
Enter Single Label Percent Rate Test
Enter Single Label Decode Rate Test
Enter Multilabel Percentage Rate Test
Enter Multilabel Decode Rate Test
PDF Information
Exit Decode Rate and Percent Rate Test
Enter Percent PDF Read Rate Test
Enable Laser Scanning
Disable Laser Scanning
Motor On
Motor Off
Programmable Output 1
Programmable Output 2
Programmable Output 3
Autodiscriminate All Codes
Enable Code 39 Only
Enable Codabar Only
Enable I 2/5 Only
Serial Trigger Character
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
17–Utilities
Part Number
Checksum/
Command
<N>
<O>
<T>
<U>
<V>
<W>
<X>
<Y>
<!>
<!b>
<!a>
<#>
<#b>
<#a>
<Cp>
<C>
<Cm>
<Cs>
<a1>
<J>
<CPDF>
<H>
<I>
<KE>
<KF>
<L1>
<L2>
<L3>
<P>
<Q>
<R>
<S>
<char>
17-3
Default/Reset/
Save
17–Utilities
Master
Label
<A>
<Ad>
<An>
<Z>
<Zp>
<Zd>
<E>
<F>
<G>
<Mmaster label
number,data>
<M?>
<Mmaster label
number,>
Network
Status
<n>
Status
Commands
<->
<?>
<?1>
<K?>
Reset (does not save for power-on)
Default
Restore Saved Settings
Reset/Save (for power-on)
Save Factory Settings
Save/Restore Factory Defaults
Enable Master Label *
Disable Master Label*
Store next label scanned to database.a
Enter data to database for specified label*
Request master label information*
Delete Master Label*
Network Status Command (See the "Network Protocol Manual" 83-110015)
Input Status
Scanner Status
Extended Scanner Status
Configuration Status
a. If no number is included, the label will be saved to database number 1.
*Can also be set in the configuration menu or with a serial configuration command. (See Chapter 11,
“Matchcode.”)
17-4
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 17 Utilities
File Transfer
File transfer is used to download application code to the scanner.
Application code versions are specific to your scanner. Consult with your sales representative before downloading application code. If needed, an application code will be
sent to you in the form of a *.mot file.
To download application code:
1. First make sure the host is connected to your scanner.
3. In the Utilities window, right-click on File Transfer and select Download/App
Code.
This will open a file dialog box.
4. Navigate to the appropriate file (a *.mot file) and open the file.
As application code begins to download to the scanner, the scanner will go silent, the
scanner’s RDY and GD/RD LEDs will flash intermittently, and a progress indicator at
the bottom of the ESP window will let you know when the download is complete.
Caution: Do not interrupt power or disconnect the host cable while download is in
progress.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
17-5
17–Utilities
2. Apply power to the scanner.
Counters
Counters
17–Utilities
Counter commands can be a numeric value from 00000 to 65,535. After reaching the
maximum numeric limit of 65,535, an error message will be displayed and the counter
will automatically roll-over and start counting again at 00000. To obtain the cumulative total of counts after the roll-over has occurred, add 65,536 per each roll-over
(the scanner does not keep track of the number of roll-overs) to the current count.
Note: All counter values will be lost if power is recycled to the scanner or the scanner
receives a reset or save command.
By ESP
You can access Counters from the Utilities menu.
Right-click the appropriate counter option and select Request to display count or
Clear to set counter to zero.
By Serial Command
Noread Counter
Sending <N> displays the total number of noreads that have occurred since the last
reset.
Noread Counter Reset
Sending <O> sets Noread Counter to 00000.
Trigger Counter
Sending <T> displays the total number of triggers since the last reset.
Trigger Counter Reset
Sending <U> sets the trigger counter to 00000.
Good Read/Match Counter (or Good Read Counter)
Sending <V> displays the total number of good reads matching the master label or, if
Master Label is not enabled, the number of good reads since the last reset. This
counter is always enabled, but will only work as a match count when Master Label is
enabled. If Master Label is not enabled, this counter records the number of good
reads. This count can be requested at any time.
17-6
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 17 Utilities
Good Read/Match Counter Reset
Sending <W> sets the Match Counter to 00000.
Mismatch Counter
Sending <X> displays the number of decoded labels since the last reset that do not
match the master label.
Mismatch Counter Reset
Sending <Y> sets the Mismatch Counter to zero.
17–Utilities
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
17-7
Part Number
Part Number
You can send a request to the scanner for part numbers, checksums, boot code, and
application and code.
17–Utilities
By ESP
You can access Part Number from the Utilities menu.
Right-click the appropriate option and select Request to see the associated part
number or check sum number.
By Serial Command
Upon sending <#> the scanner returns software part numbers for application code
<#a/__________> and boot code <#b/_________>.
Individual part numbers for Application Code and Boot Code are returned when
their respective commands <#a> and <#b> are sent.
17-8
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 17 Utilities
Checksum
You can send a request to the scanner for part numbers, checksums, boot code, and
application and code.
By ESP
By Serial Command
Upon sending <!> the scanner returns three 4-digit hex numbers that are displayed
under Check Sum. Checksums verify a scanner’s flash memory.
Individual checksums for Boot Code and Application Code are returned when their
respective commands <!b> and <!a> are sent.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
17-9
17–Utilities
You can access Checksum from the Utilities menu.
Right-click the appropriate option and select Request to see the associated part
number or check sum number.
Read Rate
Read Rate
You can do a read rate test for decode rate or percent by ESP or serial command.
By ESP
You can access Read Rate from the Utilities menu.
17–Utilities
To start or end a read rate test, right-click Read Rate and select Start or Stop.
To change from percent read rate to decodes per second, right-click Read Rate and
make the selection.
By Serial Command
Enter Single Label Decodes/Second Test
Sending <C> instructs the scanner to transmit the decodes per second and label data
(if any). The decode rate can vary dramatically due to the angle and location of the
label in relation to the scan line. This test is very useful in aligning and positioning the
scanning device during installation.
Enter Single Label Percent Test
Sending <Cp> instructs the scanner to transmit the percentage of decodes and any
scanned label data.
Enter Multilabel Percent Test
Sending <Cm> instructs the scanner to transmit the percentage of scans decoded and
label data (if any) for multiple labels.
Enter Multilabel Decode Rate Test
Sending <Cs> instructs the scanner to transmit the decode rate and label data (if
any) for multiple labels.
17-10
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 17 Utilities
Enter Percent PDF Read Rate Test
Sending <CPDF> instructs the scanner to transmit the number of decodes per second on the full PDF label. This test includes both capture and decode and translation
time. Note that the output format of the data is done as a running average of
750 mS windows. This means that you can remove the label from the view of the
scanner and it will continue to transmit some history of the label for a few outputs.
End Read Rate Test
Sending <J> ends both the Percent test and the Decodes/Second test for both
single and multi-label.
Sending the <a1> check box will cause PDF417 symbology data to be prefaced with
information consisting of error correction level, number of rows, number of columns,
number of informative code words and the number of data characters.
Explanation of above PDF Info sample of a PDF417:
Level = 5 tells you that the error correction level is level 5. There are 13 rows and 6
columns. There are 14 info code words, and 16 characters in the data.
This feature can be disabled by using the exit read rate command <J>.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
17-11
17–Utilities
Enable PDF Information
Device Control
Device Control
You can control laser scanning by ESP or serial command.
By ESP
You can access Device Control from the Utilities menu.
17–Utilities
For any of the Device Control commands, right-click on the command and make
your selection.
By Serial Command
Enable Laser Scanning
Sending <H> will turn the laser on continuously.
Note: Enable Laser Scanning does not relate to Laser On/Off command.
Disable Laser Scanning
Sending <I> will turn the laser off. This feature is useful during extended periods of
time when no bar code labels are being scanned or the scanner is being configured.
Disabling laser scanning will not affect any downloaded commands to the scanner.
Note: Disable Laser Scanning does not relate to Laser On/Off, which when
enabled also turns off the laser but only between read cycles.
Motor On
Sending <KE> turns the spinning mirror and raster mirror motors on (if not already
running).
Note: the spinning mirror reaches full speed after a short time delay.
Motor Off
Sending <KF> turns the spinning mirror motor off. This command is useful for long
idle periods.
Note: Laser turns off whenever motor is off.
17-12
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Chapter 17 Utilities
Output #1
Sending <L1> activates the link between Output 1(+) and Output 1 (–) of the 25-pin
host connector (regardless of Master Label or Output 1 status).
Output #2
Sending <L2> activates the link between Output 2(+) and Output 2 (–) of the 25-pin
host connector (regardless of Master Label or Output 2 status).
Output #3
Sending <L3> activates the link between Output 3(+) and Output 3 (–) of the 25-pin
host connector (regardless of Master Label or Output 3 status).
17–Utilities
Code Type
See also “Autodiscriminate” on page 5-29 for a discussion of Utility commands for
Code Types and Autodiscrimination.
Default:
Options:
Code 39 (only)
<P> Enables most code types.
<Q> Enable Code 39 only
<R> Enable Codabar only
<S> Enable I 2/5 only
Defaulting/Saving/Initializing
See Appendix I — “Defaulting/Saving/Initializing” on page A-24.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
17-13
17–Utilities
Defaulting/Saving/Initializing
17-14
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Appendices
Chapter Contents
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Appendices
Appendix A General Specifications ....................................................... A-2
Appendix B Electrical Specifications ..................................................... A-6
Appendix C IrDA Configuration Port.................................................... A-13
Appendix D IrDA/Ir Comm for Palm Pilot ............................................ A-15
Appendix E Serial Configuration Commands ...................................... A-16
Appendix F Serial Command Format .................................................. A-19
Appendix G ASCII Table ..................................................................... A-21
Appendix H Embedded Menus............................................................ A-23
Appendix I Defaulting/Saving/Initializing ............................................. A-24
Appendix J Position Scanner and Bar Code ....................................... A-28
Appendix K Position Object Detector .................................................. A-29
Appendix L Test Decode Rate ............................................................ A-30
Appendix M Formulas for Number of Decodes ...................................... A-31
Appendix N Operational Tips .............................................................. A-35
Appendix O Interface Standards ......................................................... A-36
Appendix P Multidrop Communications .............................................. A-38
Appendix Q Glossary of Terms ........................................................... A-43
A-1
Appendix A
Appendix A — General Specifications
Key Features
• Multiple label and symbology reading
Centerline of scan window
• Extra-long scanning range to 90 inches
• Autofocusing
• Programmable raster scanning
5.2
• IrDA (infrared) port (palm pilot compatible)
• 3 programmable outputs
• Industrial IP65 rated enclosures
• Optional wiring box, IB-880
Appendices
Mechanical
Depth: 3.5 in (88 mm)
Width: 5" (127 mm)
Height: 6 in. (152 mm)
Weight: 5 lbs. (227 g)
4X M4
.50 MAX
6.0
1.88
Environmental
Enclosure rating: IP65 for scanner and wiring box
Operating temperature: 0° to 50°C
Operating temperature: 0° to 40°C
Storage temperature: –50° to 75°C
Humidity: Up to 90% (non-condensing)
.86
.63
3.75
3.5
Emissions and Immunity
General immunity for ITE equipment:
EN 55024:98
General immunity for light industry: EN
50082:97
General immunity for heavy industry:
EN 61000-6-2:98
Radiated and conducted emissions
of ITE equipment: EN 55022:98, Class A
5.0
Figure A-1 MS-880 Scanner Dimensions
Laser Light
Semiconductor visible laser diode: 650nm nominal; 780nM nominal (optional)
Safety class: CDRH Class II
Operating Life: 40,000 hours @25°C
A-2
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
General Specifications
Scanning Parameters
Scanning mirror type:
Rotating, 14-faceted mirror
Scan rate: 400 to 1000 scans per second
Scan width angle: Typically 60°; Pitch: ±50° max.; Skew: ±40° max.
Label contrast: 25% min. absolute dark to light differential at 650nm wavelength
Raster sweep angle: ±15°
Raster sweep speed: 1 to 10 sweeps per second
Communication
RS-232, RS-422/485, Daisy Chain RS-232, RS-422/485, SDS,* DeviceNet,* Profibus,*
Ethernet,* daisy chain/auxiliary port capable, IrDa port**
*Used in conjunction with an accessory protocol card.
*The IrDa port allows communication by Palm and laptop computers.
Protocol Options with Wiring Box
DeviceNet, Profibus DP, Modicon Ethernet, DH485
Code Types
Appendices
Standard offering: Code 128, Code 39, Code 93, Codabar, Interleaved 2 of 5, UPC/EAN,
PDF417, Pharma Code
Application standards: AIAG, UCC/EAN-128
FIS Options
Table A-1 MS-880 FIS Options
-001
-002
MS-880 Standalone
MS-880 for Wiring Box
Read Ranges
Table A-2 MS-880 Read Ranges
Narrow-bar-width
Scanning Distance
.0075" (.190mm)
10" to 35" (.254 to .889m)
.010" (.254mm)
10" to 44" (.254 to 1.118m)
.015" (.381mm)
10" to 74" (.254 to 1.880m)
.020" (.508mm)
10" to 90" (.254 to 2.286m)
.030" (.762mm)
10" to 100" (.254 to 2.540m)
.040" (1.020mm)
10" to 110" (.254 to 2.794m)
.050" (1.27mm)
10" to 120" (.254 to 3.048m)
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
A-3
Appendix A
Mounting Specifications
4X M4
.50 MAX
4X M4
.50 MAX
1.88
1.88
.88
.625
3.75
.88
.625
Front
3.75
Back
Appendices
Figure A-2 Mounting Dimensions
Beeper
Beeps on output (good read, noread, match, or mismatch), serial command confirmation,
on/off.
LED Indicators
Table A-3 MS-880 Status Lights (on the side of the MS-880)
LED
POWER
GOOD READ (not in read rate
test)
STATUS (not in read rate test)
20%, 40%, 60%, 80%, 100%
NETWORK STATUS
MODULE STATUS
State
Status
Green-On
Scanner has power
Green-Off
No power
On
Scanner is ready to read
Off
Scanner is not ready to read
On
Scanner is in a read cyclea
Off
Scanner is not in a read cycle
On
Represents the percentage of good readsb
This LED is only used with embedded protocols, and its
function depends on the protocol used.c
Same as NETWORK STATUS above.
a. In Continuous and Continuous1, the status light is always on.
b. If these LEDs are flashing in a pattern and the scanner is not in a read rate test, there is an error pattern.
Contact Microscan support if this occurs.
c. Refer to Appendix A of the MS-880 Network Protocol User’s Manual for a breakdown of the LED modes.
A-4
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
General Specifications
Power LEDs (inside the wiring box)
OFF = No power is present
RED = power is present, but reversed
GREEN = power is present and correct
Safety Certifications
FCC, CDRH, CE, UL/cUL, TüV, BSMI
Product specifications are given for typical performance at 25°C (77°F) using grade A labels.
Some performance characteristics may vary at high temperatures or other environmental
extremes.
© Microscan Systems, Inc., Specifications subject to change
Appendices
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
A-5
Appendix B
Appendix B — Electrical Specifications
Maximum Operating Power: 24 Watts
Power Input: 10 to 28VDC, 200mV p-p max. ripple, 230 mA @ 24VDC (typical)
Trigger, New Master, Input 1: 4.5 to 28 VDC (optoisolated)
Pin Assignments
Note: See “Connect the System” on page 1-3 for power and host connections.
1
Appendices
Connectors on the back
of the MS-880:
1 Power connector
2 Host 25-pin connector
3 Trigger connector
2
1
25
3
4
2
1
3
1
2
3
Figure A-3 Electrical Connectors
A-6
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Electrical Specifications
Table A-4 Power Connector
1
2
3
Power grounda
Chassis ground
Power + 10 to 28 VDC
In
a. Power ground: Used for power return
only.
Caution: If using your own power supply, verify correct connection of power and
ground lines. Incorrect connections or use of “Chassis ground,” “Power ground,” and
“Signal ground” lines could cause equipment and/or software failure.
Table A-5 Trigger Connector
1
2
3
4
Power +10 to 28 VDC
NPN
Power grounda
N/C
Out
a. Power ground: Used for power
return only.
2
3
5
9
RxD232
TxD232
Signal grounda
Boot Mode
Appendices
Table A-6 Host 9-pin
Configuration Connector
In
Out
a. Signal ground: Used for communication
and signal line grounds only. Not to be
used as power or chassis return.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
A-7
Appendix B
Table A-7 Host 25-pin Connector1
Pin
Host
RS232
Host & Aux
Host
RS232
RS422/485
Chassis grounda
Host TxD
Host RxD
1
2
3
4
RTS
5
CTS
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Aux TxD
Out
In
Out
Aux RxD
In
Output 1 (+)
Signal groundb
Output 2 (+)
Trigger (–)
Trigger (+)
N/C
Input 1 (+)
Out
Out
In
In
In
13
RxD (+)
In
14
TxD (–)
Out
15
Noread/Output 3 (+)
16
Appendices
In/
Out
17
18
Power groundc
Power +10 to 28 VDC
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Out
RxD (–)
TxD (+)
Output 1 (–)
Output 2 (–)
Noread/Output 3 (–)
Input 1 (–)
New Master (–)
New Master (+)
In
In
Out
Out
Out
Out
In
In
In
a. Chassis ground: Used to connect chassis body to earth
ground only. Not to be used as power or signal return.
b. Signal ground: Used for communication and signal line
grounds only. Not to be used as power or chassis return.
c. Power ground: Used for power return only.
Caution: If using your own power supply, verify correct connection of power and
ground lines. Incorrect connections or use of “Chassis ground,” “Power ground,” and
“Signal ground” lines could cause equipment and/or software failure.
1. The host can also be accessed by the 9-pin configuration port connector on the side, by the IrDA port connector, or by connections inside the wiring box, if wiring box is used.
A-8
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Electrical Specifications
Optoisolator Outputs
Optoisolator circuits can transfer pulses between the scanner and peripherals with no
direct connection with the scanner’s internal circuitry. However, not every optoisolator
configuration provides complete isolation. The following diagrams show both fully
optoisolated and non-optoisolated circuits. They are only examples and do not represent all the possible wiring configurations.
Generic Output Waveform Characteristics
Iload =5mA Iload =50mA
V Out-On
0.7V
Iload =100mA
0.9V
1.0V
t On-Typ
30µS
20µS
30µS
t Off-Typ
1000µS
150µS
75µS
Outputs (+)
Scanner
Output
ILoad
Outputs (–)
Output Circuit Examples
Fully Optoisolated
Host
Isolated Scanner
Power (+)
1 to 28 V
Scanner
Outputs (+)
Output
Input
Outputs (–)
Power ground
Not Optoisolated, Scanner Grounded
In this diagram, power is applied
externally, but the scanner’s power
ground is used to complete the circuit.
This setup involves some risk to the
optoisolator if excessive voltages are
applied.
Caution: The maximum current that
can pass through the optoisolator is
100 mA.
Non-isolated Scanner
Host
Power (+)
1 to 28 V
Scanner
Outputs (+)
Output
Input
Outputs (–)
Power ground
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
A-9
Appendices
This circuit is fully optoisolated and the
recommended configuration. It allows
the user to apply 1 to 28 VDC to the
circuit.
Caution: The maximum current that
can pass through the optoisolator is
100 mA.
Appendix B
Additional Isolated Output Circuit Examples
Secondary Relay
1 to 28 V
Power +
Scanner
Output
Outputs (+)
Outputs (–)
Power ground
Outputs (–)
Appendices
Power ground
A-10
V
PLC
Input
Outputs (+)
Output
PLC
Power +
RELAY
Isolated Scanner
Scanner
Isolated Scanner
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
PLC
GND
Electrical Specifications
Optoisolator Inputs
All discrete inputs can be fully isolated pulses as PNP or NPN circuits.
Inputs include trigger, new master, and other discrete inputs.
Generic Waveform Characteristics
Minimum
Maximum
VIN-HIGH/IIN-HIGH
4.5V/4mA
28V/33mA
VIN-LOW/IIN-LOW
0 V/0mA
2V/2mA
Pulse Widthmin
48 µS
Input (+)
I load
Input (–)
Note: Trigger pulses can be sent to the scanner either through the host 25-pin connector or a separate 4-pin trigger connector.
25-Pin Connector Input Examples
Fully Optoisolated
PNP Source
+V
Isolated Scanner
V
CC
+V
Input (+)
Signal
Input (+)
Input (–)
Input (–)
Signal
Not Optoisolated
PNP Source
Non-isolated Scanner
V
CC
Power (+)
Input (+)
+V
V
CC
Signal
NPN Source
Non-isolated Scanner
Power (+)
+V
Input (+)
Input (–)
Input (–)
Power ground
Power
ground
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Signal
A-11
Appendices
V
CC
NPN Source
Isolated Scanner
Appendix B
4-Pin Connector Trigger Input Example
NPN Trigger Source
Non-isolated
+V
+5 to 28 V
V
Power (+)
CC
Trigger (NPN)
Signal
Appendices
Power (–)
A-12
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
IrDA Configuration Port
Appendix C — IrDA Configuration Port
Serial Menu:
Determines the flow of data between the infrared configuration port and a separate
IrDA-equipped computer terminal.
Serial Cmd:
<K103,IR status,IR timeout,menu mode>
IrDA Status
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
Enables or disables the IrDA port.
Can be used to disable all IrDA port functions when access by palmtops
is not desired, or when the scanner's periodic infrared query pulses
interfere with nearby optical sensors.
<K103,IR status,IR timeout,menu mode>
Disabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
A-13
Appendices
Provided the 9-pin configuration port is not being
used, the IrDA infrared port is always active and can
be used to communicate with an infrared-equipped
IrDA Port
remote terminal such as a laptop or a palmtop computer. It uses the standard IrCOMM 9-wire modem
emulation.
The Configuration Port communications parameters
are fixed: parity = none, stop bits = 1, and data
bits = 8, with the RTS/CTS channel not used. The
IrDA port initially connects at a baud rate of 9600
b, then automatically increases the rate to 115K b,
or to a smaller value as determined by your remote
IrDA terminal.
Figure A-4 Trigger Connector
In order to communicate with the scanner's IrDA
port, the remote infrared-equipped computer must
contain a terminal-emulation software application and the application's serial port setting must redirect serial data to the computer's IrDA port.
Note: If the IrDA port is being used to access the embedded menus and the infrared
beam is interrupted for longer than the IR timeout time, then the system will exit
from the embedded menus and a reset-without-save event will occur.
Note: When the scanner's configuration port is connected to an RS-232 serial device,
the IrDA channel will be disabled.
Appendix C
IR Timeout
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
If the infrared beam is interrupted for a period longer than the IR timeout, then the scanner's IrDA port will purge any pending data, reset
its baud rate to 9600 baud, and begin transmitting a periodic query
signal.
If more than one IrDA-equipped computer terminal is to be used in
rapid sequence with the same scanner, the scanner will not communicate with a second terminal until the infrared beam is blocked and the
default 40-second timeout has expired. To quickly communicate with
a second terminal, set the timeout to a smaller value.
<K103, IR status,IR timeout,menu mode>
40 seconds
0 = 3 seconds
1 = 12 seconds
2 = 20 seconds
3 = 40 seconds
Embedded Menu Mode
Appendices
Definition:
Usage:
Serial Cmd:
Default:
Options:
A-14
Enables or disables VT100 cursor control sequences for a particular
scanner communication port. To change the status of a particular
port, issue the command through that port.
Note: The IrDA port communicates in VT100, the host, aux, and configuration ports use TTY.
When a VT100-style computer terminal is connected to the host, aux,
configuration, or IrDA port, set the port mode from TTY to VT100 in
order to use the terminal's cursor control keys within the embedded
menus.
<K103, IR status,IR timeout,menu mode>
VT100
0 = TTY
1 = VT100
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
IrDA/Ir Comm for Palm Pilot
Appendix D — IrDA/Ir Comm for Palm Pilot
Needed:
• Palm Pilot™ with IR port
• PC with internet connection and hotsynch cradle
• IrComm drivers
• VT100 Terminal Emulator application (shareware)
Obtaining the drivers:
The IrDA drivers are found in the “irenhanc.zip” file available from Palm at:
http://www.palm.com/support/downloads/irenhanc.html
Installing the drivers:
(Read the “readme.txt” file in the zip file for complete instructions.)
1. Extract the file using a standard unzip utility. Save the 4 files in the your Palm (or
Pilot) directory. (usually found at C:\Palm or C:\Pilot)
3. Launch Palm Desktop 3.0 on your PC.
4. Select the Install Tool icon.
5. Select the correct user name from the User list. Select the Add button.
6. Locate AMX.prc, IrLib.prc, SerialIrPanel.prc and SerIrCommLib.prc in the Palm (or
Pilot) directory. Select the Add button for each of these files.
7. Select Done.
8. Perform a Hotsynch to load drivers in the Palm unit.
9. Select OK.
10. Use a paperclip to perform a soft reset on your Palm III. For more details, see
“Soft Reset” in index of the Basic Handbook manual included with your Palm III.
11. Go to the Prefs app, and select Serial/IR from the drop down list in the upper
right hand corner. Tap the Infrared box to select infrared communications. You
must restore the setting to Cradle in order to use the Hot sync cradle.
Note: An option for transferring IrDA drivers by “beaming” from one IrDA-equipped
Palm to another has been accompanied with problems. It is recommended that drivers
be installed via Palm Desktop and the cradle.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
A-15
Appendices
2. Put the Palm Pilot™ in its cradle.
Appendix E
Appendix E — Serial Configuration Commands
The following table is a list of all the available serial configuration commands, presented in numeric order. These commands are also listed at the beginning of each
applicable chapter. For utility (operational) commands see Table 17-1, “Summary of
Utility Serial Commands,” on page 17-3.
Table A-8 Serial Configuration Commands in Numeric Order
Command Title
old
cmds
Format
Host Port Parameters
Ka
K100, <K100,baud,parity,stop bits,data bits>
Aux Port Parameters
Ky
K101,
IrDA Port and Text
Appendices
new
cmds
<K101,aux port mode,baud,parity,stop bits,data
bits,daisy chain status,daisy chain ID>
K103, <K103,IR status,IR timeout,menu mode>
Host Protocol
Kf
K140, <K140,protocol>
Preamble
Kd
K141, <K141,status,preamble>
Postamble
Ke
K142, <K142,status,postamble>
Response Timeout
KA
K143, <K143,timeout>
Intercharacter Delay
KB
K144, <K144,time interval>
LRC
Kc
K145, <K145,status>
Aux/Config. Port Data
K146, <K146,aux status,config status>
Daisy Chain Auto Configure
K150
<K150DAISY>
DAISY
Daisy Chain Scanner ID
K151, <K151,daisy chain scanner,daisy chain scanner ID>
Communications Status
Request
KT?
K199? <K199?>
Triggering Mode
Kg
K200, <K200,trigger mode,filter time>
Serial Trigger Character
Ki
K201, <K201,character>
External Trigger State
Kj
K202, <K202,external trigger state>
End of Read Cycle
Kh
K220, <K220,end of read cycle status,timeout>
Decodes Before Output
Km
K221, <K221,decodes before output>
Multilabel
KL
K222, <K222,number of labels,multilabel separator>
Matchcode Type
Kn
<K223,type,sequential matching,match start posiK223, tion,match length,wild card character,
sequence on noread,sequence on every mismatch>
Master Label
Database Size
KM
K224, <K224,number of master labels>
New Master Pin
Kz
K225, <K225,status>
Optoelectric Control
<K226,mode,# active database settings,latch on
K226, trigger,timer value, control trigger 1,control trigger
2,control trigger 3>
Optoelectric
Calibration Database
K227,
A-16
<K227,database index,focus position,
gain,tracking>
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Serial Configuration Commands
Command Title
old
cmds
new
cmds
Format
Sequential Step
K228, <K228,sequence step>
Start Serial Trigger Character
K229, <K229,start trigger character>
End Serial Trigger
Character
K230, <K230,end trigger character>
Enter/Delete Master Label
Data
M
Request Master Label Data
M
Operations Status Request
KV?
Warning Message Status
K231,
<K231,master label number,master label data [no
data will delete current master label data]>
K231, <K231,?>[for all] or <K231,master label number?>
K399? <K399?>
<K400,warning message status,laser high status,laser
low status,novram/reset warning status>
K”
K400,
Lifetime Hours
K$
K401, <K401,hours10,message>
Over-temperature
K+
K402, <K402,degrees,message>
Under-temperature
K-
K403, <K403,degrees,message>
Laser Overcurrent
K;
K404, <K404,message>
Laser Undercurrent
K:
K405, <K405,message>
Power-on/Resets Counts
K_
K406, <K406,powerups,resets>
K@?
K407? <K407?> returns: hours,minutes (read only)
Present Operating
Temperature
K%?
K408? <K408?> returns: deg (read only)
Narrow Margins/Symbology ID
Ko
K450, <K450,narrow margins status,symbology ID status>
Background Color
Kx
K451, <K451,background color>
Code 39
Kp
<K470,status,check digit status,check digit output
K470, status,large intercharacter gap,fixed code length
status,fixed code length,full ASCII>
Codabar
Kq
K471,
<K471,status,start & stop match status,start &
stop output status,large intercharacter gap,fixed
code length status,fixed code length,check digit
type,check digit output>
Interleaved 2 of 5
Kr
K472,
<K472,status,check digit,check digit output,length
1,length 2,guard bar>
UPC/EAN
Ks
K473,
<K473,status,EAN status,supplementals status,separator status,separator char,supplemental type>
Code 128
Kt
K474, <K474,status,fixed length,length...>
UCC/EAN-128
Kt
<K474,,,,UCC/EAN-128 status,output format,sepaK474, rator status,separator character,application identifier parentheses,record padding>
Code 93
K!
K475,
<K475,status,fixed code length status,fixed code
length>
PDF417
K[
K476,
<K476,status,raster sweeps before decode
attempt,fixed code length status,fixed code length>
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
A-17
Appendices
Time Since Last Reset
Appendix E
Command Title
old
cmds
Pharma Code
K477,
Code Type Status Request
KW?
Format
<K477,status,fixed code length status,fixed code
length,min. no. of bars,bar widths,fwd/rev>
K499? <K499?>
Scan Speed
KE
K500, <K500,scan speed>
Maximum Element
KI
K502, <K502,max element>
Gain/Tracking
KD
K504, <K504, gain,tracking>
AGC Settings
KH
K505,
<K505,transition counter status,transition counter
threshold>>
Raster
KR
K506,
<K506,status,top offset,bottom offset,raster sweep
rate,read cycle on/off>
Focus
K.
K508, <K508,focusposition,zero position>
Scanner Setup
Status Request
Appendices
new
cmds
KU?
K699? <K699?>
Laser
KC
K700,
<K700,laser on/off status,laser framing status,laser off
time,laser on time,laser power>
Serial Verification
KS
K701,
<K701,serial command echo status,serial command
beep status,control/hex output>
Beeper
Ku
K702, <K702,status>
Quality Output
KJ
K704, <K704, quality output separator,reads/trigger status>
Bar Code Output
Kl
K705, <K705, status,when to output>
Output During Diagnostic
Warning Messages
K713,
<K713,output#,status1,status2,status3,status4,
status5,status6,status7,status8,status9>
Noread Message
Kk
K714, <K714,status,message>
Output 1
Kv
<K720, output on,active state,pulse width,output
K720, mode,trend analysis mode,trigger evaluation
period,number to output on,reads per trigger threshold>
Output 2
Kw
<K721, output on,active state,pulse width,output
K721, mode,trend analysis mode,trigger evaluation
period,number to output on,reads per trigger threshold>
Output 3
K‘
<K722,output on,active state,pulse width,output
K722, mode,trend analysis mode,trigger evaluation
period,number to output on,reads per trigger threshold>
Input 1
KK
K730, <K730, mode,active state>
Extraction Mode
KS
K740, <K740,output #,start position,length>
Insertion Mode
Ku
K741, <K741,output #,length,hex string>
Assignment Command
KJ
K742, <K742,label number,status>
Output Format Status
Kl
K743, <K743,output format status>
<K744,filter#,code type,length,wildcard
character,placeholder character,data>
Ordered Output
K744,
Number of Filters
K745, <K745,number of filters involved>
Scanner Interface
Status Request
A-18
KX?
K899? <K899?>
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Serial Command Format
Appendix F — Serial Command Format
Serial commands are of two types: utility and configuration.
Rules that apply to both utility and configuration commands
• A less than < and greater than > characters enclose the commands.
• Commands and data are “case sensitive.” That is, characters must be entered as
upper or lower case, as specified.
Serial Utility Commands
These are sent during operations and are not followed by a <A> or <Z>. See Table
17-1, “Summary of Utility Serial Commands,” on page 17-3.
Serial Configuration “K” Commands
See Appendix F — “Serial Command Format” on page A-19.
Serial Configuration Command Conventions
• All data fields (except the last) must be followed by a comma (without a space).
• The following characters cannot be used: , < > NUL.
• All fields preceding a modified field must be included.
• If there is no change in preceding fields, then commas alone can be entered in
these fields. For example, if only the last field in the following command is changing, <K100,4,1,0,0> can be entered as <K100,,,,0>.
• All fields following a modified field can be omitted. For example, to change Baud
Rate, send <K100,3>.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
A-19
Appendices
These begin with a single K character followed by a 3-digit numeric, data fields, and
an initializing command, as follows:
<Knumeric parameter,data,data,...etc.><initializing command>
An initializing command <A> or <Z> always follows the command. A <Z> initializes
the scanner’s memory and saves for power-on; an <A> initializes the scanner’s memory but does not save for power-on.
For example, to enable UPC and save the change for power-on, send
<K473,1><Z>.
To change Baud Rate and reset without saving changes for power-on, send
<K100,a3><A>.
Note: Previous serial commands had alphabetic parameters following the K and did
not insert a comma before the 1st field, as in <Kf5>. The new “numeric” commands
include a comma after the numeric parameter, as in <K140,5>.
Appendix F
Concatenating Configuration Commands
Commands can be concatenated (added together) in a single string or data block. For
example, <K145,1><K220,1><K450,1><A> enables LRC, sets End of Read
Cycle mode to New Trigger, enables Narrow Margins, and resets the data buffers
(without saving the changes for power-on).
Serial Command Status Request
To ensure that any command was received and accepted, you can send the Show
Scanner Status command: <?>.
The status of a specific serial command can be requested by entering the command
followed by a question mark. For example, send <K142?> to request the status of
Postamble. Commands <K199?>, <K399?>, <K499?>, <K899?>, and
<K699?> are used to request the status of groups of serial commands. Note that
there is no comma between the numeric and the question mark.
Appendices
Entering Special Characters in Serial Commands
To enter control characters within a serial command, hold down the control key while
typing the desired character.
Example: To enter a carriage return and line feed (^M^J), enter
<K141,1,CNTL-m CNTL-j>
Entering Special Characters in Embedded Menus
Control Characters
Control characters entered on the command line are displayed in the menu as mnemonic characters, such as: <CR><LF><NUL><NUL>.
Press SP (the space bar) once, then enter the control character by holding down the
control key and simultaneously pressing the desired character. For example to define
a line feed, press SP, then Control and J simultaneously. It is displayed as ^J on the
command line and as <LF> in the menu when the screen is refreshed.
To Define a Carriage Return as a Character
Press SP, then CR. It is displayed as ^M on the command line and as <CR> in the
menu when the screen is refreshed.
To Define a Space as a Character
Press SP twice. It is displayed as a blank space in the menu when the screen is
refreshed. While it appears that nothing has been assigned, the hex value 20 will be
sent during data transmission.
To Select NUL as the Character
Press SP, then a 0 (zero). It is displayed as <NUL> in the menu when the screen is
refreshed.
A-20
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
ASCII Table
Appendix G — ASCII Table
Table A-9 ASCII Table with Control Characters
Hex
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
Mne
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
Ctrl
^
^A
^B
^C
^D
^E
^F
^G
^H
^I
^J
^K
^L
^M
^N
^O
^P
^Q
^R
^S
^T
^U
^V
^W
^X
^Y
^Z
^[
^\
^]
^^
^_
Dec
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
Hex
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
Ch
SP
!
“
#
$
%
&
'
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
Dec
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
Hex
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
Ch
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Dec
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
Hex
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
Ch
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
D
A-21
Appendices
Dec
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Appendix G
Table A-10 Communication Protocol Commands
Protocol Command
Control Characters
Hex
(Mnemonic displayed (Entered in menu or
Code
on Microscan menu)
serial command)
Effect of Command
^D
04
Reset
REQ
^E
05
Request
EOT
^D
04
Reset
STX
^B
02
Start of Text
ETX
^C
03
End of Text
ACK
^F
06
Acknowledge
NAK
^U
15
Negative Acknowledge
XON
^Q
11
Begin Transmission
XOFF
^S
13
Stop Transmission
Appendices
RES
A-22
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Embedded Menus
Appendix H — Embedded Menus
In addition to ESP-MP, you can also use a communications menu such as Microsoft’s
HyperTerminal to establish communication with Microscan’s embedded menus.1
1. With your host connected to the 9-pin configuration port, set your host communications settings as follows: 57.6K baud, 8 Data Bits, 1 Stop Bits, and None Parity.
With your host connected to the 25-pin configuration port, set your host communications settings as follows: 9600, 7, 1, and Even.
2. Set Flow Control to None.
3. Make the communications port selection. (Usually COM 1 or COM 2 for desktops
and COM 1 for laptops.)
4. Upon connection, send a <D> command to bring up the main menu.
Appendices
Note: The 9-pin configuration port settings are not changeable.
Important: To receive bar code data through the 9-pin configuration port, you must
enable the port with the following command: <K146,,1>.
Menu navigation commands are case sensitive. Use the space bar or N to advance to
the next item, CR (return key) to select a highlighted item, B to return to the previous item, M to return to the previous menu, and ESC to return to the Main menu or to
exit the program. When exiting the program, you will be prompted to save your active
settings for power up (Y or N). Typing Y will be equivalent to saving with a <Z> command.
1. If you are using Microsoft’s HyperTerminal program, you may find that the initial screen is
unviewable when you call up the program with the <D> command. If this occurs, simply exit
the embedded menu with a ESC, E, and N sequence and repeat the <D> command.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
A-23
Appendix I
Appendix I — Defaulting/Saving/Initializing
Defaults are original or saved settings. Defaulting occurs when default settings (from
flash or user-saved NOVRAM) are restored. Defaulting might be necessary if you have
make temporary changes, communications between the scanner and another device are
lost or interrupted, or you are using incompatible equipment (for example, a terminal
that is set at 9600 baud communicating with a scanner that is set at 38.4K baud).
Initializing occurs whenever any command or set of commands is implemented.
Active Memory (SRAM) is where the scanner’s active settings are stored during use.
These are not available on power-up.
User-saved NOVRAM (non-volatile random access memory) is where the scanner’s
operating parameters are stored for power-on. It can be changed by user command.
Flash Defaults is where the scanner’s default download/boot programs are stored. It
can only be changed by downloading application/boot codes.1
Appendices
Defaulting
Restore NOVRAM Defaults to Active Memory
• Restores user-defined NOVRAM settings to active
memory.
<An>
• Initializes serial configuration commands in
active memory and resets counters to zero.
Initialize
Active
Memory
By Serial Command
Send <An> command to the scanner.
By ESP (There is no equivalent ESP command.)
Restore Flash Defaults to Active Memory
• Restores flash defaults to memory.
• Initializes serial configuration commands in
active memory and resets counters to zero.
User-Saved
NOVRAM
<Ad>
Send <Ad> command to the scanner.
Initialize
Active
Memory
• Does not save settings to NOVRAM for power-on.
By Serial Command
Flash
Defaults
User-Saved
NOVRAM
By ESP
1. Right-click in the configuration window and
select Default All ESP Settings.
2. Right-click and select Save to Scanner, Send and Save.
1. See your Microscan sales representative to access the latest application codes.
A-24
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Flash
Defaults
Defaulting/Saving/Initializing
Restore Flash Defaults to Active Memory and for Power-on
Caution: Defaulting the scanner to flash default settings will overwrite user-saved NOVRAM settings.
• Restores flash defaults to memory.
<Zd>
Active
Memory
• Restores flash defaults to user-saved NOVRAM
for power-on.
• Initializes serial configuration commands in
active memory and resets counters to zero.
Initialize
User-Saved
NOVRAM
Flash
Defaults
By Serial Command
Send <Zd> command to the scanner.
By ESP
1. Right-click in the configuration window and select Default All ESP Settings.
2. Right-click and select Save to Scanner, Send and Save.
By Hardware Default
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
A-25
Appendices
There is no hardware default for the MS-880. Default commands can be entered from
any of the host connectors. Since the default communications settings on the 9-pin
connector are fixed, you can always send a default the scanner through this port with
a software command.
Appendix I
Saving
Save Active Settings except Factory for Power-on
• Initializes serial configuration commands in
active memory and resets counters to zero.
Initialize
<Z >
• Saves all active settings except factory settings
to NOVRAM for power-on.
By Software Command
Send <Z> command to the scanner.
By ESP
Active
Memory
User-Saved
NOVRAM
Flash
Defaults
Right-click in the configuration window and select
Save to Scanner, Send and Save.
Save Active Settings including Factory for Power-on
Appendices
• Initializes serial configuration commands in
active memory and resets counters to zero.
• Saves all active settings including factory settings to
NOVRAM for power-on (factory settings include but
are not limited to Focus, Gain, Tracking, and
Scan Speed).
By Serial Command
Initialize
<Zp>
Active Memory
and Factory Settings
User-Saved
NOVRAM
Flash
Defaults
Send <Zp> command to the scanner.
By ESP
Right-click in the configuration window and select Advanced, Send and Save,
Including Factory.
A-26
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Defaulting/Saving/Initializing
Initializing
Initializing is a part of all save and default functions. It is also used as a follow-on to
implement serial configuration commands into active memory.
• Initializes serial configuration commands in
<A >
Initialize
active memory and resets counters to zero.
• Does not save settings to NOVRAM.
Active
Memory
By Serial Command
Send <A> after a serial configuration command or
a string of serial configuration commands, for
example, <K141,1><A>.
User-Saved
NOVRAM
Flash
Defaults
By ESP
Right-click in the configuration window and select Save to Scanner, Send No Save.
This will initialize all serial configuration changes that have been made in the current
ESP session.
Loss of Communications
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
A-27
Appendices
Making changes to communications with the host such as Baud Rate, Parity, Stop
Bits, LRC, etc. without corresponding changes in linked device(s) can result in the
loss of menu access through the 25-pin port and wiring box connections. If this should
occur, connect the scanner to the 9-pin port and set your host communications settings as follows: 57.6K baud, 8 Data Bits, 1 Stop Bits, and None Parity. These settings for this port are fixed and cannot be changed.you should restore the scanner’s
defaults. If you wish to return to the 25-pin host port, you’ll first need to change the
scanner’s communications settings by sending: <K100,4,1,0,0><Z>.
Appendix J
Appendix J — Position Scanner and Bar Code
In positioning the scanner in relation to the bar codes being scanner, consider the following:
• Position the scanner in a place devoid of sunlight, bright lights, or laser light from
other sources.
• Avoid excessive tilt, skew, or pitch. Maximum tilt is determined by label characteristics and the number of decodes required. Maximum skew is ±40°; maximum pitch
is ±50°.1
• Pitch or skew label or scanner a minimum of ±5° to avoid specular reflection, the
return of direct, non-diffused light.2 For the MS-880, specular reflection is avoided
by pitching labels at least 5° plus or minus from a line perpendicular to the default
position of the Bottom Offset and Top Offset.
Appendices
Skew
axis
Direction
of travel
Tilt
axis
Pitch
axis
Scanner
Figure A-5 Scanner/Label Position
1. Maximum tilt is determined by label characteristics and number of decodes required.
2. The specular reflection zone is a narrow zone straight out from the scanner in which direct
reflected light from a label can distort the scanner’s ability to distinguish bars from spaces.
A-28
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Position Object Detector
Appendix K — Position Object Detector
In a typical operation, a scanner will wait for bar code data only during a triggered
read cycle. A read cycle is initiated by a “trigger” and can be in the form of a serial
command from the host (internal trigger) or a signal from an object detector (external trigger).
When an object detector (also called a sensor, package detector, etc.) is used, it is set
up so that its beam will bounce off the approaching object and the resulting pulse will
be sent to the scanner to begin the read cycle. Typically, a detector is positioned so
that it will detect the presence of an object before its label can be scanned.
An object detector is mounted in almost any position relative to the object as long as
(1) the object passes within range of the detector and (2) direct or reflected light from
the detector does not interfere with the scanner’s reception.
As the item continues to move down the line, its label moves into the scanner beam
and is read by the scanner.
The drawing below shows a label in the picket fence direction with the object detector
positioned so as not to cause interference.
Appendices
Bar-coded Object
Bar-coded Object
Object
Detector
Scanner
Figure A-6 Object Detector
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
A-29
Appendix L
Appendix L — Test Decode Rate
With a Static Label
1. Position a stationary bar code in front of a functioning scanner at the scan distance used in your application.
2. Set for single scan line scanning (Top Offset setting equal to Bottom Offset).
3. Enter a <C> command to see the decodes per second.
The decode rate is the number of decoded scans per total number of scan. It will
appear at the beginning of the data strings.
Note: You can also enter a <Cp> command to see the percentage of decodes
per scans.
4. Make a note of the decode rate. You will need this when calculating the number of
decodes (see Appendix M — “Formulas for Number of Decodes” on page A-31).
Appendices
5. End the test by sending the <J> command.
Number of Decodes
To ensure reliable scanning, you need to apply a minimum of five decodes to each bar
code. This means that all variables, label speed, read range, etc. are significant.
Note: Variations between labels are common. For this reason, the greater number of
sample bar codes tested, the more likely you are to achieve optimum decode rates.
In general, the number of decodes of a given bar code can be increased by:
• Increasing label height
• Decreasing label length
• Increasing scan rate (spinning mirror speed)
• Slowing label speed
• Decreasing raster sweep rate
• Decreasing raster height
With a Moving Label
Before testing with a moving label, it is highly recommended that you calculate the
expected number of decodes by using the formulas in Appendix M — “Formulas for
Number of Decodes” on page A-31.
Once you’ve mounted the scanner, established a good read rate with a stationary
label, and calculated the number of decodes for your label speed, you can begin
decoding with moving labels.
A-30
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Formulas for Number of Decodes
Appendix M — Formulas for Number of Decodes
To ensure reliable scanning, apply a minimum of five decodes to each bar code. Use
the formulas below to calculate the number of decodes that your label will receive.
If the number of decodes you derive from one of these calculations is less than the
minimum for your application, plug in the minimum number of decodes (5) and solve
for another parameter that might be changed, such as label speed or scans per second.
Note: While the formulas given here solve for the predicted number of decodes, you
may also use the formulas to solve for other parameters that might be changed, such
as label speed, label length, etc.
Single Line Ladder Calculation
Direction of label travel
Ladder scanning is seldom done with raster scanning unless
the raster is set for single scan line scanning (Top Offset
setting equal to Bottom Offset) or bar codes are presented
as stop-and-go.
For single scan line ladder scanning, use the following formula:
Figure A-7 Ladder
LH (Label Height) (ladder formula only) is a measurement of the height of individual bars.
LS (Label Speed) is the distance per second that a bar code moves through the scan.
DR (Decode Rate) is the number of decodes per second that a given bar code receives
(as derived from a stationary scan test in Appendix L — “Test Decode Rate” on
page A-30).
Example 1:
LH = 1 inch
LS = 100 inches per second
DR = 900 scans per second
1
ND =  --------- × 900 – 3 = 6 complete decodes
100
1. The -3 component in the formula is included to allow for AGC acquisition, an incomplete first
scan, and an incomplete last scan. This applies only if the number inside the parentheses equals
4 or more. If the number equals 3, then only subtract 2 to derive 1 good scan.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
A-31
Appendices
 LH
-------- × DR – 3 = NS (number of decodes) 1
 LS

Scan Line
Appendix M
Raster Picket Fence Calculation
Direction of label travel
For raster picket fence scanning, the number of decodes
(ND) is calculated in two formulas, one for sweep rate and
the other for number of decodes.
Sweep Rate.
Raster pattern
Since the speed of the raster (SwR) cannot exceed 10 you
first need to ensure that you can achieve this by solving for
Figure A-8 Raster
sweep rate (SwR). Sweep rate is the number of raster
Picket Fence
sweeps (up or down) that occur in a second. Sweeps per
second should generally be as few as possible in order to maximize the number of
decodes applied to a given label.
The formula for finding Sweep Rate (SwR) is as
2 × LS
SwR = --------------------------follows:1
Appendices
( SW – LL )
SwR = Sweep Rate, the number of passes, up or
down, that are described by the arc of the raster mirror.
LS = Label Speed, the inches per second that a bar code moves through the scan.
SW = Scan Width, the width across the scan beam, at a given distance from the scanner, in which a label can be read (picket fence formula only).
LL = Label Length, the length of the longest printed label to be read plus the length of
the quiet zones (picket fence formula only).
Example
SW = 5 inches
LS = 2 inches per second
LL = 1 inch
2×2
SwR = ---------------- = 1
(5 – 1)
Important: The maximum sweep rate that your can set the scanner to is 10. If your
solution is greater than 10, you must change another parameter such as label speed,
etc. and recalculate.
Since SwR can only be entered into the software as whole numbers, round off fractions of SwR to the next higher number, for example enter 0.4 as 1 and 3.5 as 4.
Number of Decodes
Number of decodes (ND) for a picket fence bar
code is calculated by the following formula:
Example:
× 900- – 3 = 87 decodes
ND = 1----------------10 × 1
DR = Decode Rate is the number of
decodes per second.
RH = Raster height
LH = Label height
LH = 1
DR = 900
RH = 10
1. The number 2 in the SPS formula ensures that each label receives two full raster sweeps.
A-32
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Formulas for Number of Decodes
Single Scan Line Picket Fence Calculation
For single scan line picket fence scanning (Top Offset setting equal to Bottom Offset), use the following formula:
SW – LL )
 (--------------------------× DR – 3 = number of complete decodes 1

LS
Direction of label travel
Example:
LL = 2 inches (including quiet zones)
LS = 100 inches per second
SW = 4 inches
Scan Line
DR = 1000 decodes per second
4 – 2)
 (---------------× 1000 – 3 = 17 complete decodes
 100

Figure A-9 Picket Fence
Angled Picket Fence Calculation
Direction of label travel
Appendices
The number of complete scans for angled picket fence is
calculated the same as that for picket fence, with the
exception that the scan width is shortened in proportion
to scan tilt.
Scan Line
Improving the Number of Decodes
Figure A-10 Angled
Picket Fence
After changing any of the parameters described in this section, recalculate the number
of decodes.
Scan Rate
Scan rate is a function of motor speed and is adjustable. A slower scan rate may allow
greater label range and/or higher decode rates, but at the cost of fewer scans per
label.
Range
Adjusting the label’s range, if possible, is one of the quickest and most effective ways
to improve decode rates. However, in some applications you may need to select a less
than optimum range, or one that is beyond the fringes of the ranges.
Scan Width
Increasing scan width will increase the number of scans in a picket fence oriented
application. Scan width is linked with scan range and changing one will usually require
a change in the other.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
A-33
Appendix M
Label Speed
Applies to both picket fence and ladder oriented labels. If your application allows it,
slowing label speed (the time in seconds that a label is fully within the scan width of
the scanner) is an effective way to increase the number of decodes.
Raster Height
When using the raster features, you can increase the decode rate by decreasing the
height of the raster image.
Raster Sweep Rate
Slowing the number of sweeps per second to the minimum needed will result in more
scan lines passing over the label and a higher decode rate.
Laser Framing
Narrowing the laser frame may not increase the decode rate, but it will minimize the
opportunity of extraneous reads.
Appendices
Label Dimensions, Label Density, and Label Ratio
Not usually an option in most applications, but changes to label parameters can affect
number of decodes calculations and possibly decode rates.
If your application allows it, shortening the length of a picket fence label means the
label will be in the scan range longer and hence receive a greater number of scans.
Increasing the height of a ladder label means it will receive more scans. Changing
label density and/or bar code ratio is another way ranges, decode rates, etc. can be
altered.
Gain and Tracking
These adjustments, typically made by qualified technicians, are referenced in the
Scanner Setup menu (see “Save Active Settings including Factory for Power-on” on
page A-26). Changes to tracking will generally have a limited affect on decode rates.
A-34
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Operational Tips
Appendix N — Operational Tips
Do:
• Check inputs (label speed, length, height, etc.) to ensure the desired number of
decodes per label.
• For optimum decodes, mount scanner so that your labels pass through the center of
the depth-of-field (minimum/maximum range). You find the center by moving your
label in and out during a read rate test.
• Avoid excessive tilt, pitch, and skew of the bar code label.
• Check the bar code label for readability by doing a decode rate test. If there is any
question about the label's readability, contact your Microscan representative at
[email protected].
• After changing any parameter that might affect decode rate, repeat decode rate
test.
• Clean the scanner window with a clean, dry Q-tip or cotton cloth on a regular basis.
• Aim the scanner into direct light or sunlight.
• Aim the scanner into an external object detector or other light-emitting device.
• Obstruct the scanner window with mounting hardware or other objects.
• Connect chassis of scanner and host to different ground potentials.
• Operate the scanner in excessive temperature environments.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
A-35
Appendices
Do Not:
Appendix O
Appendix O — Interface Standards
Interface Standards, established by the Electronic Industries Association (EIA), specify such things as the signaling voltage levels, maximum cable lengths, and number of
drivers. With Microscan devices, selection of interface is made by pin assignment and,
in the case of the host communications, by software switching between RS-232 and
RS-422. Microscan devices use RS-232, RS-422, and RS-485 multidrop.
RS-232
RS-232 defines an interface between two devices such as, for example, the scanner
and host. It differs from the other interfaces by dedicating individual pins to specific
functions and by requiring both devices to share a common ground line. Since both
device chassis are connected to a common ground, a ground loop potential and the
possibility of noise interference exists. Therefore cable lengths are limited to a maximum of 50 feet (19.7m). Despite being the most limited, this interface is used frequently because of the large installed base of RS-232 equipment.
Appendices
RS-422
RS-422, unlike RS-232, measures signals deferentially; that is, the receiver looks at
the potentials between the two receive (or transmit) wires rather than the potential
between signal and ground. As a result, cables, if shielded, can be up to 4000 feet
(1219m) in length. Like RS-232, RS-422 communication is designed for only two
devices on a single line and must have a common ground. It can be used wherever
RS-232 is used.
RS-485
RS-485, like RS-422, can transmit up to 4000 feet (1219 m) using differential voltages but unlike RS-422, its transmitters are turned off until a request for data is
received from the host. RS-485 is used exclusively in multidrop protocol.
DeviceNet
DeviceNet is a versatile, general purpose FieldBus designed to satisfy 80% of the
most common machine- and cell-level wiring requirements. One of DeviceNet's major
benefits is its multiple messaging formats, which allow the bus to 'work smart' instead
of work hard.
A-36
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Interface Standards
ProfiBus DP
PROFIBUS is a vendor-independent, open field bus standard for a wide range of applications in manufacturing and process automation. Vendor-independence and openness are ensured by the international standards EN 50170 and EN 50254. PROFIBUS
allows communication between devices of different manufacturers without any special
interface adjustment. PROFIBUS can be used for both high-speed time critical applications and complex communication tasks.
Modicon Ethernet
The Modicon Ethernet system consists of three basic elements:
1. the physical medium used to carry Ethernet signals between computers
2. a set of medium access control rules embedded in each Ethernet interface that
allow multiple computers to fairly arbitrate access to the shared Ethernet channel
3. an Ethernet frame that consists of a standardized set of bits used to carry data
over the system
DH485
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
A-37
Appendices
The DH485 network offers:
intercommunication of up to 32 devices,
peer-to-peer capability, the ability to add or remove nodes without disrupting the network
maximum network length of 1219m (4000
ft.), can be extended to 2438m (8000 ft.) with 2 AIC+ units.
Appendix P
Appendix P — Multidrop Communications
This appendix describes the rules for setting
up a concentrator or controller to communicate with a scanner in standard Multidrop
protocol.
The diagram to the right shows a typical Multidrop network in which 1 to 50 scanners can
communicate with a host via an intermediary
device, a concentrator or a controller.
Host
Concentrator
Polled Protocol
Multidrop ONLY
RS-485 Interface
Scanner 01
Scanner 02
Scanner 03
Appendices
Configure Your Scanner for Multidrop
1. With the scanner connected to the host, do Retrieve Scanner Settings as in
Step 5 —“Retrieve Scanner Settings” on page 2-6.
2. Select Multidrop in the Protocol configuration menu.
You will see the following message:
Warning. You must change your preamble and postamble characters so that they are not CR or NULL.
This allows data to move through the concentrator without interference.
3. Click OK.
4. Next, go to Preamble Characters (still in the Protocol menu) and double-click
on Characters.
5. This will open up an ASCII character table. Select any character other than CR.
For example, select LF.
6. Repeat the above for Postamble.
7. Check the multidrop address. Enter a number from 01 to 50.
8. Right-click in the window and select Save to Scanner and Send and Save.
9. Your scanner is now in multidrop. From here on, you will need to use the concentrator to relay commands and data between the scanner or scanners and the host.
10. Next, go to “Connect to Scanner via the Concentrator” on page A-39.
A-38
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Multidrop Communications
Connect to Scanner via the Concentrator
You will need a multidrop concentrator and the required power supplies and cabling to
communicate with your scanner(s).
1. From the Communications drop down menu,
select Configure Multidrop to bring up the Multidrop Settings dialog.
2. If necessary, change the default address to match
the address of your multidropped scanner and
click OK.
If the host serial port is not connected in ESP, you
will see the following popup message:
ESP is not currently connected to the multidrop concentrator. Do you wish to establish a connection now?
3. Click Yes.
You will see a Serial Communication Parameters dialog as shown on the
next page.
Notice that the Force Connection option is checked. Do not change this.
Appendices
4. Select the concentrator’s host port communications
settings.
When you click Connect, you will be connecting to
your concentrator, which can then relay commands to
the scanner whose address was set in the Multidrop
Settings dialog.
5. Click Connect.
6. You should see the CONNECTED message in green at
the bottom of the window along with the scanner’s
Multidrop address.
7. Do Retrieve Scanner Settings to upload scanner’s
configuration (Step 5). If upload fails, return to the
Serial Communication Parameters
dialog and make the corrections.
8. Follow the same procedure for connecting other scanners to your
multidrop network.
Note: For more information, see your scanner user’s manual or Microscan’s MS-5000
Multidrop Concentrator User’s Manual, 83-005000.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
A-39
Appendix P
Polling Sequence
Data that is transmitted to the host (bar code data, noread messages, counters, etc.)
via concentrators is solicited by poll requests from the host.
The polling sequence example by poll address 1E (ASCII hex value for Scanner 02)
and a REQ (request). The scanner responds by first transmitting its own address, 1E,
followed by a STX (start of text) character, and then the data. Next it transmits an
ETX (end of text) character and an LRC (longitudinal redundancy check) character.
If the concentrator (or controller) receives the data from the scanner and is able to validate it with an LRC calculation, it responds with an ACK (acknowledgment). If the scanner in turn receives the ACK, the scanner ends this exchange with a RES (reset).
Start of Sequence
Concentrator
Appendices
Scanner 02
End of Sequence
RES 1E REQ
ACK
1E STX DATA ETX LRC
RES
Figure A-11 Polling Sequence
Polling Reset
• If the scanner has no information, it responds to a poll request by transmitting a
RES (reset).
• If the scanner receives a NAK instead of the ACK after transmitting its data string, it
will re-attempt to send the data string up to three times. If the scanner still does
not receive an ACK, it will send a RES (reset) and discard the data in its buffers.
• If the scanner transmits data to the concentrator and the concentrator responds
with an ACK or NAK, but the scanner doesn’t receive the concentrator’s response,
the scanner will timeout and send a REQ to the concentrator and request another
response. If after three retries (the number of times it transmits a REQ to the concentrator) the scanner receives no response, it ends the transmission with a RES
(reset).
A-40
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Multidrop Communications
Select Sequence
Unlike poll requests, select commands always originate from the host and consist of
serial configuration or operation commands to devices that are configured in Multidrop. The scanner complies with the command when it is polled during the cycle.
Start of Sequence
Concentrator RES 1F REQ
Scanner 02
End of Sequence
STX <T>ETX LRC
1F ACK
RES
1F ACK
Figure A-12 Polling Sequence
Select Reset
If the scanner receives bad data from the concentrator, it transmits a SEL (its select
address) and a NAK to the concentrator. The concentrator re-transmits the data up to
three times. The concentrator will end the sequence with a RES (reset) if no ACK is
received.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
A-41
Appendices
A RES (reset) is the first command in the select sequence. The 1F hex is the select
address associated with Scanner 02 address. It is followed by a REQ (request). The
scanner responds with its own select address, 1F hex, and an ACK (acknowledge).
The concentrator then transmits an STX (start of text), the data (in this case a <T>),
an ETX (end of text), and an LRC character.
The scanner replies by transmitting its own address, followed by an ACK, acknowledging receipt of the command. Upon receipt of an ACK, the concentrator concludes the
successful exchange with a RES.
In the example above, the scanner only acknowledges a trigger counter request from
the concentrator. It does not respond to the trigger counter request until a subsequent poll. For example, if the scanner’s trigger count was 12 at the time the trigger
counter request was received, on a subsequent poll it would send 02T/00012. (The 02
at the beginning of the string is the scanner’s address.)
Appendix P
Table A-11 Multidrop Addresses
Multidrop
Address
Appendices
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
A-42
Poll
Character
ASCII
HEX
^\
1C
^^
1E
SP
20
"
22
$
24
&
26
(
28
*
2A
,
2C
.
2E
0
30
2
32
4
34
6
36
8
38
:
3A
<
3C
>
3E
@
40
B
42
D
44
F
46
H
48
J
4A
L
4C
Select
Character
ASCII
HEX
^]
1D
^1F
!
21
#
23
%
25
'
27
)
29
+
2B
2D
/
2F
1
31
3
33
5
35
7
37
9
39
;
3B
=
3D
?
3F
A
41
C
43
E
45
G
47
I
49
K
4B
M
4D
Multidrop
Address
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Poll
Character
ASCII
HEX
N
4E
P
50
R
52
T
54
V
56
X
58
Z
5A
\
5C
^
5E
`
60
b
62
d
64
f
66
h
68
j
6A
l
6C
n
6E
p
70
r
72
t
74
v
76
x
78
z
7A
|
7C
~
7E
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Select
Character
ASCII
HEX
O
4F
Q
51
S
53
U
55
W
57
Y
59
[
5B
]
5D
_
5F
a
61
c
63
e
65
g
67
i
69
k
6B
m
6D
o
6F
q
71
s
73
u
75
w
77
y
79
{
7B
}
7D
D
7F
Glossary of Terms
Appendix Q — Glossary of Terms
Bar Code Density. Number of characters per inch or other unit of measure.
Baud Rate. The number of discrete signal events per second. Bits per second.
Capture. The act of grabbing or recording a frame by an sensor. A frame or succession
of frames that are captured.
Channel. A high-speed pathway between the computer and the control units of the
peripheral devices.
Check Digit. A Modulus 43 or Modulus 10 digit that is added to the bar code message
for additional data integrity.
Command Processing. Allows the user to enter the ESP program from the auxiliary
port or send serial string commands from the auxiliary port.
Configuration. A setup or process of changing a scanner’s settings to conform to a
specific application.
Concentrator. Intermediary device that relays data from scanners to a host and
commands from the host to the scanner or other devices.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
A-43
Appendices
Active On (ION). An optoisolated input that’s logically “on” when current flows through
the connection points.
Active Off (IOFF). An optoisolated input that’s logically “on” when no current flows
through the connection points.
Analog Gain Adjustment (AGC). Adjustment to signal strength that seeks to maintain a constant level regardless of the range of the bar code label.
Application Record. A variation of UCC/EAN-128 which adds an application identifier
to label data, including user-definable separators, brackets, and padding.
Autocalibration. A routine that cycles through various optical settings and selects the
combination that produce the best read rate.
Autodiscriminate. The ability to decode several different bar code symbologies without changing configuration.
Auto Range. Outward focus of the scanner until an object is sensed by signal strength.
The scanner then begins searching for a decodable label.
Auxiliary Port. RS-232 connections to an auxiliary terminal or device for remote
viewing. the transfer of data to and from the host, and under certain conditions a configuration port.
Bar Code. The symbol used for recognition by a bar code scanner. An array of parallel
bars and spaces of varying widths that conform to recognized standards and can be
decoded and displayed as serial data.
Bar Code Data. The information that is transmitted from a decoded bar code symbol.
Bar Code Label. The physical media on which a bar code symbol is presented.
Appendix Q
Connector. Physical device (plug or socket) on a device or cable to provide in/out
connectivity for various circuits and pins.
Counter. Memory space provided to keep track of scanner events.
Daisy Chain. Linkage of master and slave scanners to allow data to be relayed up to
the host via auxiliary port connections.
Decode. A good read. The successful scanning and decoding of the information
encoded in a bar code label.
Default. Restores ROM or Flash settings, initializes serial commands and resets all
counters.
Delimited. A command or field that is bracketed by pre-defined characters.
Appendices
Decode Rate. The number of good reads per second decoded by the scanner.
Depth of Field. The distance between the minimum and maximum range in which a
scanner can read bar code labels.
Discrete I/O. Inputs and outputs characterized by discrete signal transitions from one
voltage level to another so that digital switching can occur.
EPROM. Erasable, programmable, read only memory.
Embedded Memory. Onboard memory device such as EPROM or flash.
End of Read Cycle. The time or condition at which the scanner stops expecting label
information to decode.
External Edge. Allows a read cycle to be initiated by a trigger signal from an object
detector when it detects the appearance of an object (rising edge). The read cycle
ends with a good read, a timeout, or a new trigger.
External Level. Allows a read cycle to be initiated by a trigger signal from an object
detector. The read cycle ends when the object moves out of the detector’s range.
Falling Edge. A change of state (to inactive) associated with a level trigger in which
the scanner stops searching for bar code symbols. (See Rising Edge.)
Fixed Code Length. Increases data integrity by ensuring that only one label length
will be accepted.
Flash Memory. Memory that can be changed by downloading new code.
Focal Length. The distance measured from the scanner to the center of the depth of
field, or focal point.
Focus. The point at which the tip of the scan beam is at its narrowest.
Frame. The total area scanned in an image sensor.
Full Duplex. Auxiliary port data is sent directly to the host but not displayed on the
auxiliary port screen.
Gain. Optimal signal strength.
Good Read. A decode. The successful scanning and decoding of the information
encoded in a bar code label.
Half Duplex. Auxiliary port data is sent directly to the host and displayed on the auxiliary port screen.
A-44
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Glossary of Terms
Host. A computer, PLC, or other device that is used to execute commands and process data and discrete signals.
Host Port. The pins or connections on a scanner or other device that physically connect with a host and—using the RS-232, RS-422, or RS-485 standards—pass data and
serial commands from one device to another.
Initialize. Implement serial configuration commands into the scanner’s active memory.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
A-45
Appendices
Input. A channel or communications line. Decoded data or a discrete signal that is
received by a device. See Output.
Intercharacter Delay. The time interval in milliseconds between individual characters transmitted from the scanner to the host.
Intercharacter Gap. The extra space between the last element of one character and
the first element of the adjacent character of a specific bar code symbol.
IrDA. Infrared Data Association which promotes interoperable, infrared data interconnection standards.
Label Height. Regardless of orientation, the measurement taken along the length of
a label’s individual bars.
Label Length. Regardless of orientation, the measurement taken across the label's
bars from one end to the other, including the quiet zone.
Label Speed (LS) is the distance per second that a label moves as it travels through
the scan lines.
Label Transitions. The transition of bars and spaces on a label, used to detect the
presence of a label on an object.
Ladder Label Orientation. A bar code label in which the bars are parallel to the
label’s direction of travel.
Large Intercharacter Gap. Allows the scanner to read symbols with gaps between
bar code characters that exceed three times (3x) the narrow element width.
Laser Framing. Setting scan width size by adjusting the on/off duration of the laser
beam.
Laser On/Off. When enabled, the laser is ON only during the read cycle, provided
the scanner is enabled for a Serial or External trigger.
LED. Light emitting diode.
Longitudinal Redundancy Check (LRC). An error-checking routine that verifies the
accuracy of transmissions.
Master Scanner. First scanner in a daisy chain mode and linked directly to the host
and in tandem to slave scanners.
Matchcode. The ability to compare bar code labels being scanned against a master
label that is stored in the memory of the scanner.
Embedded Menu. Configuration options embedded in the scanner’s erasable memory.
ESP-MP Menu. Easy Setup Program—Multiple Platform. Configuration program that
runs in Windows-based operating systems 95 and above.
Appendix Q
Appendices
Mil. One thousandths of an inch or 0.0254 mm. In bar-coding, a measurement standard that identifies a bar code label by the width of its narrowest element.
Mismatch. An event that occurs when the scanned bar code label does not match the
master label that is stored in the memory of the scanner.
Multilabel. A scanner mode which allows a scanner to read more than one bar code
label in a single read cycle.
Multidrop. A communications protocol for networking two or more scanners or other
devices with a concentrator (or controller) and characterized by the use of individual
device addresses and the RS-485 standard.
Narrow-bar-width. The width of the narrowest bar of a given label, expressed in
thousands of an inch (or mils).
Narrow Margins. Allows the scanner to read symbols with quiet zones less than 8
times the width of the narrow bar element.
Non-delimited. A command that is not bracketed by pre-defined characters.
Non-volatile RAM (NOVRAM). Random Access Memory that is available on poweron; that is, after power to the unit has been recycled.
Noread. A non-read. A condition that occurs when the scanner is set up to decode
labels but no label is scanned during the read cycle.
Normally Closed. A discrete output state that is only active when open.
Normally Open. A discrete output state that is only active when closed.
NOVRAM. Non-volatile random access memory. Data that is saved for “power-on” is
saved to NOVRAM.
Number of Decodes. The number of times a bar code label is scanned by the scanner during one pass through the laser beam.
Object Detector. A photo electric device used to sense the presence or absence of an
object (also referred to as a package detector).
Output. A channel or communications line. Data or discrete signals that are transmitted or displayed by a device.
Output Format. The modification of data output according to a user-defined index
of Extraction and Insertion commands.
Parity. An error detection routine in which one data bit in each character is set to 1 or
0 (zero) so that the total number of 1 bits in the data field is even or odd.
Picket Fence Label Orientation. A bar code label in which the bars are perpendicular to the label’s direction of travel.
Pitch. Label (or scanner) rotation around the center of a line perpendicular to the
label’s bars.
Point-to-Point. A protocol consisting of a single communications event, typically
used to connect a bar code scanner to a terminal or host computer.
Port. Logical circuit for data entry and exit. (One or more ports may be included
within a single connector.)
A-46
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Glossary of Terms
Protocol. The rules for communication between devices, providing a means to control
the orderly flow of information between linked devices.
Quiet Zones. Specified “clear” (non printed) areas immediately before and after the
bar code symbol. The area is usually white (for black and white bar code) and at least
10 times the width of the narrowest bar, as measured in thousands of an inch. The
zones can be other than white as long as their densities remain consistent and they
have the required contrast relative to the bars.
RAM. (Random Access Memory) Memory that is lost after power is recycled to the unit.
Raster. Multiple, stacked scans produced by a separate oscillating mirror or by a
spinning mirror with varying facet angles.
Read Cycle. A programmed period of time or condition during which the scanner will
accept bar code label input.
Read Range. The distances in which a label can be reliably read, as measured from
the front of the scanner. See “Depth of Field.”
Relay. An electrical switch that allows a low power to control a higher one.
Reset. Sets all counters to zero.
Scanner. A scanning device that is comprised of a scan head and a decoder integrated in one package.
Scan Rate (SR) The number of decodes per second that a given scanner is capable of
casting.
Scan Width (SW) is the width across the scan beam at a given distance from the
scanner in which a label can be read.
Send. Transmit data from one device to another.
Separator. A character that separates data fields.
Serial Commands. Online data strings such as <D> or <P> sent from a host or auxiliary terminal to a scanner or other device.
Serial Configuration (Host Configuration). Serial command specifically for changing
configuration and distinguished from operational command by the fact that they modify the non-volatile for power up configuration.
Skew. Label (or scanner) rotation around the center of the skew axis.
Slave Scanner. Linked to the master or preceding scanner in a daisy chain and relays
bar code data to the host. See “Daisy Chain.”
Specular Reflection Zone. The narrow zone straight out from the scanner in which
direct reflected light from a label can distort the scanner’s ability to distinguish bars
from spaces.
Supplemental. A character or data string that is appended to the main bar code
symbol.
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
A-47
Appendices
Rising Edge. A change of state (to active) that initiates (and in some cases ends) a
read cycle with a new trigger, an edge trigger, or the leading edge of a level trigger.
(See Falling Edge.)
ROM. (Read Only Memory) Memory that cannot be changed.
Appendix Q
Sweep. One pass of the raster, up or down.
Sweep Rate (SwR) is the number of passes per second, up or down, describing the
raster image.
Symbol. A bar code. A decodable unit of information that is recognized by a bar code
scanner.
Symbology. A code type, such as Code 39 or Code 128, with special rules to define
the widths and positions of bars and spaces to represent specific numeric or alphanumeric information.
Symbology ID. An AIM standard prefix character that identifies the bar code type.
Tilt. Label (or scanner) rotation around the centerline of the scan beam.
Timeout. A user-selected period of time that ends a scanner's read cycle.
Tracking. Adjustment of the precision of analog-to-digital conversion.
Appendices
Transmission. The transfer of data over a communications channel.
Transmit. Send or convey signals or information from one device to another.
Transparent. Data is passed between the auxiliary port and the host with keyed data
echoed to the auxiliary port
Trigger. A signal, transition, or character string that initiates a read cycle.
Watchdog Timer. A security device that detects system crashes and attempts to
reset the scanner.
Watchdog Reset. A reset that is forced whenever the software locks up.
Wild Card. User-defined character entered into a master label to permit matches
with variable characters.
A-48
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Index
Numerics
Auxiliary System Data 3-14
25-pin host connector
Host connector 1-3
9-pin Host Configuration Connector 1-3
B
A
C
Calibration Database
by embedded menu 7-6
by ESP 7-3
by serial command 7-1, 7-4
Calibration Database, overview 7-2
Calibration with Multilabel 7-2, 8-6
Caution Summary i-xiv
CDRH i-xii
CE Compliance i-xii
Check Digit
Codabar 5-13
Code 39 5-8
I 2 of 5 5-14
Checksum 17-9
Codabar 5-11
Code 128 5-22
Code 39 5-8
Code 93 5-26
Code Length
I 2 of 5 5-15
Code Type 17-13
Code Type, Output Filtering 13-12
Code Types
by Embedded Menu 5-4
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Index
About This Manual i-xi
Active Data Base Settings 8-10
Active State 14-4
Active State, discrete outputs 14-6
Advanced Output Format by ESP 13-9
AGC 10-6
AGC Status 6-9
Ambient Temperature 15-11
Application code 17-5
Application Record
UCC/EAN-128 5-23
Application Record Brackets, UCC/EAN-128
5-24
Application Record Padding, UCC/EAN-128
5-25
Application Record Separator
UCC/EAN-128 5-24
Approvals i-xii
As Soon As Possible, output 12-6
ASCII Table, including control characters
A-21
Auto Connect 1-9
Auto Range 6-6
Autocalibration 1-13
by embedded menu 6-8, 6-10
by ESP 6-4
by serial command 6-7
Autocalibration Steps 6-3
Autoconfigure 2-16
Autodiscriminate, Code Types 5-29
Automatic/Static Mode 8-6
Aux Port Communications Parameters 2-14
Auxiliary Port 2-8
Background Color 5-7
Bar Code Symbologies A-3
Bar Widths, Pharma Code 5-28
Baud Rate
aux port 2-14
host port 2-5
Beeper A-4
Beeper Status 12-10
Bottom Offset 9-4
BSMI i-xii
I-1
Index
Index
by embedded menu 5-3
by ESP 5-2
by serial command 5-3
COM1 1-8
Command Processing Mode 2-13
Communication Protocol Commands A-22
Communications 2-1
by embedded menu 2-4
by ESP 2-3
by serial command 2-3
host 25-pin 2-2
host 9-pin 2-2
host by wiring box 2-2
host IrDA port 2-2
Communications Options 2-2
Communications Port 1-8
Communications, loss of A-27
Communications, Specifications A-3
Configuration Status 3-14
Configuration System Data 3-14
Connect 1-9
Connector, power A-6
Connectors, Electrical A-6
Continuous Read 4-4
Continuous Read 1 Output 4-5
Control Characters A-20
Control Trigger 8-8
Control Trigger Mode, optoelectric database
8-7
Control/Hex Output 12-9
Counters 17-6
Counts 15-12
cUL i-xii
D
Daisy Chain Autoconfigure 2-16
Daisy Chain ID 2-15
Daisy Chain Mode 2-12
Daisy Chain Remote Scanner ID 2-17
Daisy Chain Scanner ID 2-17
Daisy Chain Scanner Number 2-17
Data Bits
aux port 2-14
I-2
host port 2-6
Database Index 7-4
DataHighway Plus 3-15
Decode Rate A-30, A-31
Decodes/Second Test 17-10
Decoding Direction, Pharma Code 5-28
Default Commands A-24
Default Flash Defaults to Active Memory and
for Power-on A-25
Default NOVRAM Defaults to Active Memory
A-24
Defaulting 17-13
Defaulting/Saving/Initializing A-24
delimited 4-10
Device Control 17-12
DeviceNet A-36
DFALT-C 15-7
DFALT-F 15-7
DH485 A-37
Diagnostic Outputs 14-11
Diagnostics 15-1
by embedded menu 15-3
by ESP 15-2
by serial command 15-2
Dimensions, MS-880 Scanner A-2
Disclaimer i-ii
Discrete I/O
by embedded menus 14-3
by ESP 14-2
by serial command 14-2
Download 17-5
Download code 17-5
E
EAN Status 5-17
EAN-128 5-23
Easy Setup Program i-ix
Easy Setup Program - Multiple Platform 1-6
Electrical Specifications A-6
Embedded Menu Mode A-14
Emissions, Specifications A-2
End of Read Cycle 4-13
End of Read Cycle, output 12-7
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
End Read Rate Test 17-11
End Serial Trigger Character 4-11
Enter Master Label Data 11-12
Environmental, Specifications A-2
ESP (Easy Setup Program) i-ix
Ethernet A-37
External Trigger Edge 4-7, 4-8
External Trigger Level 4-6
External Trigger State 4-12
Extraction
by ESP 13-5
by Serial Command 13-6
Extraction Mode 13-5
F
G
Gain 7-4, A-34
Gain Adjustment 10-6
General Specifications A-2
H
Half Duplex Mode 2-10
Hardware Required 1-2
Hex Output 12-9
Hex String 13-8
High Temperature Threshold 15-8
Host 25-pin Connector A-8
Host 9-pin Configuration Connector A-7
Host Communications i-xi
Host connector 1-3
Host Port Parameters 2-5
I
Immunity A-2
Initializing 17-13
Initializing (resetting) Commands A-27
Input 1 14-4
Insertion
by ESP 13-7
by Serial Command 13-8
Insertion Mode 13-7
Install ESP-MP 1-6
Intercharacter Delay 3-11
Interface A-3
Interface Standards A-36
Interleaved 2 of 5 5-14
IrDA Communications for Palm Pilot A-15
IrDA Configuration Port A-13
IrDA Port 1-3
IrDA Status A-13
Index
FCC i-xii
File Transfer 17-5
Filter #, Output Filtering 13-12
Filtering 13-11
Fixed Bar Length
Pharma Code 5-27
Fixed Code Length
Codabar 5-12
Code 128 5-22
Code 39 5-9
Code 93 5-26
PDF417 5-20
Flash memory i-ix
Focal Range 6-11
Focus 10-5
Focus Position 7-4, 10-5
Focus Positions 6-11
Focus Stepping 6-5
Formulas for Number of Decodes A-31
From Host 3-7
Full ASCII Set (Code 39) 5-10
Full Duplex Mode 2-11
Fully Optoisolated circuit A-9, A-11
Glossary of Terms A-43
Good Decode Reads 4-9
Good Read/Match Counter 17-6
Good Read/Match Counter Reset 17-7
Guard Bar (I 2/5) 5-16
K
K Commands A-19
Keystrokes i-xi
L
Label Density A-34
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
I-3
Index
Index
Label Dimensions A-34
Label Height A-31
Label Length A-32
Label Ratio A-34
Label Speed A-31, A-32, A-34
Ladder Calculation, single line A-31
Large Intercharacter Gap
Codabar 5-12
Code 39 5-9
laser beam i-xiv
Laser Control 9-6
Laser Framing 9-7, A-34
Laser High Warning 15-5
Laser Light, Specifications A-2
Laser Low Warning 15-6
Laser Off Time 9-8
Laser On Time 9-8
Laser On/Off 9-6
Laser Power 6-9, 9-8
Laser Scanning 17-12
Laser Scanning, disable 17-12
Laser Settings
by embedded menu 9-9
Latch Mode, discrete outputs 14-7
Latch on Trigger, optoelectric database 8-10
Lifetime Hours 15-10
Load Current Settings from Configuration Database 7-5
Longitudinal Redundancy Check 3-9
Low Temperature Threshold 15-9
LRC 3-9
M
Master Label
by ESP 11-11
Master Label Data
Delete 11-14
Enter 11-12
Request 11-13
Request All 11-13
Store Next Label Scanned 11-15
Master Label Database 11-11
Master Label Database Size 11-11
I-4
Master Scanner 2-16
Match Counter 17-6, 17-7
Match Length 11-7
Match Start Position 11-6
Match, discrete outputs 14-5
Matchcode
by embedded menu 11-3
by ESP 11-2
by serial command 11-2
Matchcode Type 11-5
Matchcode, overview 11-4
Maximum Element 10-8
Mechanical A-2
Menu Mode 2-19
Minimum Number of Bars, Pharma Code 5-28
Mirror Type A-3
Mismatch Counter 17-7
Mismatch Counter Reset 17-7
Mismatch or Noread, discrete outputs 14-5
Mismatch, discrete outputs 14-5
Model Selection 1-7
Motor Off 17-12
Motor On 17-12
Mounting Plate, wiring box 16-9
Mounting Specifications A-4
Multidrop 3-6
Multidrop Addresses A-42
Multidrop Communications A-38
Multilabel 4-16
Multilabel Decode Rate Test 17-10
Multilabel Output Format Assignment 13-10
Multilabel Percent Test 17-10
Multilabel Separator 4-17
N
Narrow Margins 5-5
Network Client 3-15
Network Trigger 4-8
New Master Pin 11-16
New Trigger 4-15
Noise Interference A-36
non-delimited 4-10
Noread Counter Reset 17-6
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
Noread Message, output 12-4
Noread, discrete outputs 14-6
Not Optoisolated A-11
NOVRAM Corrupt Warning Status 15-7
NOVRAM/Default Warnings 15-4
Null Modem Cable 1-2
NULs, defining A-20
Number of Active Database Settings 8-10
Number of Decodes A-30
Number of Filters 13-14
Number of Labels 4-16
NVRAM-C 15-7
NVRAM-D 15-7
O
P
Package detector A-29
Padding, Application Record, UCC/EAN-128
5-25
Palm Pilot A-15
Parity
aux port 2-14
host port 2-5
Part Number 17-8
PDF Information 17-11
PDF417 5-20
PDF417 Decode Test 6-9
Percent PDF Read Rate Test 17-11
Percent Test 17-10
Pharma Code 5-27
Picket Fence Calculation
Angled A-33
Raster A-32
Single Scan Line A-33
Pin Assignments A-6
Pitch A-28
Placeholder Character, Output Filtering 13-13
Point-to-Point
standard 3-4
with RTS/CTS 3-5
with RTS/CTS & XON/XOFF 3-5
with XON/XOFF 3-5
Polling Mode D 3-5
Polling Sequence A-40
Position Scanner and Symbol A-28
Postamble Characters 3-13
Power A-6
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
I-5
Index
Object Detector A-29
Operating Life A-2
Operational Serial Commands 17-3
Operational Tips A-35
Optoelectric Database Modes 8-5
Optoelectrics
by Embedded Menu 8-3
by ESP 8-2
by serial command 8-2
Ordered Output 13-11
Ordered Output/Filtering
by embedded menu 13-12
by ESP 13-11
by serial command 13-12
Output 1 14-5
Output 2 14-10
Output 3 14-10
Output Circuit Samples A-9
Output Data 12-1
by ESP 12-3
Output Data Format 3-12
UCC/EAN-128 5-23
Output Filtering 13-11
Output Format/Filtering
by embedded menu 13-3
by ESP 13-2
overview 13-4
Output Format/Filtering by Serial Command
13-2
Output Mode, discrete outputs 14-7
Output On, discrete outputs 14-5
Output, diagnostic 14-12
Output-1 17-13
Output-2 17-13
Output-3 17-13
Outputs
by embedded menu 12-2
by serial command 12-2
Index
Quality Output 12-11
Request Database Settings 7-5
Reset A-27
Reset Counts 14-4
Reset Flash Defaults to Active Memory A-24
Resets 15-12
Response Timeout 3-10
Restore Commands A-24
Restore Flash Defaults to Active Memory
A-24
Restore Flash Defaults to Active Memory and
for Power-on A-25
Restore NOVRAM Defaults to Active Memory
A-24
Retrieve as Comparison 1-11
Retrieve Scanner Settings 1-10
RS-232 A-36
RS-422 A-36
RS422 Status 2-7
RS-485 A-36
R
S
Range 1-14, A-33
Raster Height A-34
Raster Settings
by embedded menu 9-9
Raster Setup 9-3
Raster Sweep Rate 9-5, A-34
Raster/Laser
by Embedded Menu 9-9
Raster/Laser Setup
by Embedded Menu 9-2
by ESP Menus 9-2
by serial command 9-1
Read Cycle 4-13
by ESP 4-2
Read Cycle/Trigger
by embedded menu 4-3
by serial command 4-2
Read Ranges A-3
Read Rate 17-10
Reads per Trigger Threshold 14-8, 14-9
Reads/Trigger Status 12-11
Remote Scanner ID 2-17
Safety Certifications A-5
Safety Labels i-xiii
Save Active Settings except Factory for Power-on A-26
Save Active Settings including Factory for
Power-on A-26
Save Commands A-24
Save Current Settings to Configuration Database 7-5
Saving 17-13, A-26
Scan Range 1-14
Scan Rate A-33
Scan Speed 10-4
Scan Width A-32, A-33
Scanner Range
Range 1-12
Scanner Setting 6-9
Scanner Setup
by embedded menu 10-3
by ESP 10-2
by serial command 10-2
Scanning Parameters A-3
Power (inside the wiring box) A-5
Power Connector A-7
Power connector 1-3
Power Supply 1-2
Powerups 15-12
Preamble Characters 3-12
Present Ambient Temperature 15-11
Profibus 3-15
ProfiBus DP A-37
Protocol 3-4
by embedded menu 3-3
by ESP 3-2
by serial command 3-2
Protocol Commands A-22
Pulse Width, discrete outputs 14-6
Pulse, discrete outputs 14-7
Index
Q
I-6
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
aux port 2-15
host port 2-5
Supplementals
UPC/EAN 5-18, 5-19
Sweep Rate A-32
Symbology ID 5-6
T
Test Label 1-14
Test Range 1-14
Tilt A-28
Time Since Last Reset 15-13
Timeout
read cycle 4-14
Timeout Duration, Read Cycle 4-15
Timeout or New Trigger 4-15
Timer Mode, optoelectric database 8-6
Timer Value, optoelectric database 8-11
Top Offset 9-3
Tracking 7-4, 10-6, A-34
Transition Counter 10-7
Transition Counter Threshold 10-7
Transition Sample Counter 10-7
Transparent Mode 2-9
Trend Analysis Mode 14-8
Trend Analysis, discrete outputs 14-6
Trigger Connector A-7
Trigger connector 1-3
Trigger Counter 17-6
Trigger Counter Reset 17-6
Trigger Evaluation Period 14-9
Trigger Filter Duration 4-9
Trigger Input (4-pin) A-12
Trigger Mode 4-4
Trigger Threshold 14-8, 14-9
TTY 2-19
TüV i-xii
Index
Select Sequence A-41
Sensor A-29
Separator Character
UCC/EAN-128 5-24
UPC/EAN 5-19
Separator, Quality Output 12-11
Sequence On Every Mismatch 11-9
Sequence On Noread, Matchcode 11-8
Sequence Step 11-10
Sequential Matching, Matchcode 11-6
Serial Command Beep 12-8
Serial Command Echo 12-8
Serial Command Format A-19
Serial Command Status Request A-20
Serial Commands
Code Types 5-3
Output Data 12-2
Utilities 17-3
Serial Commands, concatenating A-20
Serial Configuration Commands A-19
Serial Configuration Commands, summary
A-16
Serial Configuration Summary
Communications 3-2
Protocol 2-3
Serial Data 4-8
Serial Trigger 4-10
Serial Trigger Character
delimited 4-10
Serial Utility Commands A-19
Serial Verification 12-8
Show Comparison 1-11
Skew A-28
Slave Scanner 2-16
Special Characters in Embedded Menus A-20
Special Characters in Serial Commands A-20
Specular reflection 1-12, A-28
Standalone 1-3
Start & Stop Match
Codabar 5-11
Start and Stop Trigger Characters 4-10
Start Serial Trigger Character 4-11
Stop Bits
U
UCC/EAN-128 5-23
UL i-xii
Unlatch Output 14-4
UPC/EAN 5-17
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual
I-7
Index
User Defined Multidrop 3-8
User Defined Point-to-Point 3-6
Utilities
by ESP 17-2
by serial command 17-3
Utility Commands A-19
Utility Serial Commands, summary 17-3
Z
Zero Position, focus 10-5
V
VT-100 2-19
Index
W
Warning Messages, diagnostics 15-4
Warranty Statement i-iii
When to Output Bar Code Data 12-6
Wild Card Character, Matchcode 11-7
Wildcard Character, Output Filtering 13-13
Windows NT i-ix
Wiring Box 1-4
Aux RS-232 16-7
description 16-2
Field Bus Port 16-6
Input 1 16-6
Installation Steps 16-3
Jumpers 16-5
Mounting Plate 16-9
New Master Pin 16-7
PCB with Connectors 16-8
Polarity 16-7
Portal Holes 16-2
Ports 16-5
Power LED 16-7
Power Port 16-6
Relay Modules 16-5
Relay Terminals 16-6
RS-232 16-7
RS-422/485 16-6
Terminal Strip Specifications 16-2
Trigger Port 16-7
Voltage 16-6
Wiring Box Connections 1-5
Wiring Box, protocol options A-3
I-8
MS-880 Industrial Long Range Scanner User’s Manual